Sunteți pe pagina 1din 441

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operator’s Manual
C-Class Sedan

C-Class Sedan
2 0 3 5 8 4 3 4 7 1

Order No. 6515 0183 13 Part No. 203 584 34 71 USA Edition A, 2007
C 230
C 230 Sport
C 280
C 280 4MATIC
C 350
C 350 4MATIC
C 350 Sport
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your signed to acquaint you with the opera-
desire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 31


Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 22 Unlocking ............................................. 32
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 32
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26 Starter switch positions.................. 32
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 27 Adjusting .............................................. 34
retail buyers and lessees Upper part ...................................... 27 Seats .............................................. 34
of Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11 Lower part ...................................... 28 Steering wheel................................ 38
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 29 Mirrors............................................ 41
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 30 Driving.................................................. 43
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belt ................... 43
Operating your vehicle Starting the engine ......................... 46
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13 Parking brake ................................. 48
Where to find it.................................... 14 Driving ............................................ 48
Symbols............................................... 15 Switching on headlamps................. 50
Operating safety .................................. 16 Turn signals .................................... 50
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Windshield wipers........................... 51
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Problems while driving.................... 53
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Parking and locking.............................. 54
Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18 Parking brake ................................. 54
Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Switching off headlamps................. 55
Information regarding Turning off engine........................... 55
electronic recording devices .......... 19 Releasing seat belts........................ 56
Locking ........................................... 56
Contents

Lighting ............................................. 109


Safety and Security ........................... 57 Controls in detail ............................... 91 Exterior lamp switch .................... 109
Occupant safety................................... 58 Locking and unlocking ......................... 92 Combination switch ..................... 113
Air bags .......................................... 59 SmartKey ....................................... 92 Corner-illuminating front
Occupant Classification System..... 64 Checking the batteries................... 95 fog lamps* (C 230 (Canada only),
Seat belts ....................................... 69 Loss of SmartKey C 280, C 350 and models
Active head restraint ...................... 73 or mechanical key .......................... 95 with 4MATIC: with
Children in the vehicle.................... 74 Opening the doors from the inside. 96 Bi-Xenon* headlamps) ................. 113
Blocking of Opening the trunk .......................... 96 Hazard warning flasher ................ 115
rear door window operation ........... 80 Closing the trunk............................ 97 Interior lighting ............................ 116
Panic alarm* ........................................ 81 Trunk emergency release ............... 98 Door entry lamps ......................... 117
Activating ....................................... 81 Valet locking .................................. 99 Trunk lamp................................... 117
Deactivating ................................... 81 Automatic central locking .............. 99 Instrument cluster ............................. 118
Driving safety systems......................... 82 Locking and unlocking Adjusting
ABS ................................................ 82 from the inside............................. 100 instrument cluster illumination .... 118
BAS ................................................ 84 Seats ................................................. 101 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 119
ESP® ............................................... 85 Front seat active head restraints . 101 Resetting trip odometer ............... 119
Four wheel electronic traction Rear seat head restraints ............. 101 Tachometer.................................. 120
system (4MATIC) with the ESP® ..... 88 Lumbar support............................ 105 Outside temperature indicator..... 120
Anti-theft systems................................ 89 Multicontour seats* Control system .................................. 121
Immobilizer..................................... 89 (Canada only) ............................... 105 Multifunction display.................... 121
Anti-theft alarm system* ................ 89 Seat heating*............................... 106 Multifunction steering wheel........ 122
Memory function* ............................. 107 Menus.......................................... 124
Storing positions into memory ..... 108 Standard display menu ................ 126
Recalling positions from memory. 108 AUDIO menu ................................ 127
NAV* menu.................................. 129
Contents

Vehicle status Climate control................................... 164 Charcoal filter ............................... 183


message memory menu ............... 130 Deactivating the Air conditioning ............................ 184
Settings menu.............................. 131 climate control system ................. 167 Residual heat and ventilation
Trip computer menu..................... 144 Operating the climate control (Canada only)................................ 185
TEL menu* ................................... 146 system in automatic mode............ 167 Rear passenger compartment
Manual transmission ......................... 149 Setting the temperature................ 168 adjustable air vents ...................... 186
Shifting into reverse..................... 150 Adjusting air Audio system...................................... 187
Automatic transmission*................... 151 distribution and volume ................ 168 Audio and telephone, operation.... 187
Gear selector lever....................... 151 Adjusting air volume ..................... 169 Operating safety ........................... 187
Shifting procedure ....................... 152 Front defroster.............................. 169 Operating and display elements ... 188
Gear selector lever positions ....... 153 Air recirculation mode .................. 170 Button and soft key operation ...... 190
Driving tips................................... 155 Air conditioning............................. 172 Operation...................................... 190
Gear ranges ................................. 156 Rear passenger compartment Radio operation ............................ 194
Automatic shift program .............. 157 adjustable air vents....................... 173 Introduction to satellite radio*
One-touch gearshifting................. 158 Automatic climate control .................. 174 (USA only)..................................... 197
Emergency operation Deactivating the automatic CD mode....................................... 201
(Limp-Home Mode) ...................... 159 climate control system ................. 177 GSM network phones ................... 208
Good visibility .................................... 160 Operating the automatic TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 214
Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 160 climate control system Emergency calls “911” ................. 219
Rear view mirrors ......................... 160 in automatic mode ........................ 177 Power windows .................................. 221
Sun visors .................................... 161 Setting the temperature................ 178 Opening and closing
Rear window sunshade* .............. 162 Adjusting air distribution............... 178 the windows ................................. 221
Rear window defroster ................. 163 Adjusting air volume ..................... 179 Synchronizing power windows...... 222
Front defroster.............................. 179 Summer opening feature .............. 223
Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 180 Convenience closing feature......... 223
Air recirculation mode .................. 181
Contents

Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................ 224 At the gas station .............................. 271
Opening and closing Operation ......................................... 259 Refueling...................................... 271
the power tilt/sliding sunroof ...... 224 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 260 Check regularly
Synchronizing Driving instructions............................ 261 and before a long trip................... 273
the power tilt/sliding sunroof ...... 226 Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 261 Engine compartment ......................... 274
Driving systems ................................. 227 Drinking and driving ..................... 261 Hood ............................................ 274
Cruise control............................... 227 Pedals .......................................... 261 Engine oil ..................................... 276
Loading .............................................. 230 Power assistance ......................... 262 Transmission fluid level................ 277
Roof rack*.................................... 230 Brakes.......................................... 262 Coolant level ................................ 278
Ski sack* (Canada only) ............... 230 Driving off .................................... 263 Battery ......................................... 279
Split rear bench seat* .................. 233 Parking......................................... 264 Windshield washer system
Loading instructions..................... 235 Tires ............................................. 264 and headlamp cleaning system*.. 280
Cargo tie-down rings* .................. 236 Hydroplaning................................ 265 Tires and wheels................................ 281
Useful features .................................. 237 Tire traction.................................. 265 Important guidelines .................... 281
Storage compartments................. 237 Tire speed rating .......................... 266 Tire care and maintenance........... 282
Cup holders.................................. 239 Winter driving instructions ........... 267 Direction of rotation..................... 284
Ashtrays ....................................... 241 Standing water............................. 268 Loading the vehicle ...................... 284
Cigarette lighter ........................... 242 Passenger compartment .............. 268 Recommended
Power outlet................................. 243 Driving abroad.............................. 268 tire inflation pressure................... 289
Telephone*................................... 244 Control and operation Checking tire inflation pressure ... 290
Tele Aid* ...................................... 247 of radio transmitters .................... 268 MOExtended system* .................. 294
Garage door opener* ................... 253 Catalytic converter....................... 269 Tire labeling ................................. 295
Emission control .......................... 270 Load identification ....................... 299
Coolant temperature.................... 270 DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................. 299
Maximum tire load ....................... 301
Contents

Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 301 Replacing bulbs.................................. 367


Uniform Tire Quality Grading Practical hints .................................. 321 Bulbs............................................. 368
Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 302 What to do if … ................................... 322 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 370
Tire ply material ........................... 304 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 322 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 373
Tire and loading terminology........ 304 Lamp in center console................. 331 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 375
Rotating tires ............................... 307 Vehicle status messages Removing and installing
Winter driving .................................... 308 in the multifunction display........... 333 wiper blades ................................. 375
Winter tires .................................. 308 Where will I find ...? ............................ 356 Flat tire............................................... 377
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 309 First aid kit.................................... 356 Preparing the vehicle .................... 377
Snow chains................................. 309 Vehicle tool kit.............................. 356 Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 377
Maintenance...................................... 310 Minispare wheel............................ 359 MOExtended system* ................... 382
Maintenance service indicator Spare wheel bolts ......................... 360 Battery ............................................... 383
message....................................... 310 Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 361 Disconnecting the battery ............ 384
Calling up the maintenance Unlocking the vehicle.................... 361 Removing the battery ................... 384
service indicator display............... 312 Locking the vehicle ....................... 362 Charging and
Resetting the Manually unlocking the reinstalling the battery.................. 385
maintenance service indicator ..... 312 transmission gear selector lever ... 363 Reconnecting the battery ............. 385
Vehicle care....................................... 313 Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 364 Jump starting...................................... 386
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 313 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ........... 364 Towing the vehicle.............................. 388
Resetting activated head restraints.... 365 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 390
Resetting Fuses.................................................. 391
activated head restraints .............. 365 Main fuse box
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 366 in passenger compartment........... 392
SmartKey ...................................... 366 Fuse box
in engine compartment................. 392
Fuse box in trunk .......................... 394
Contents

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 409


Technical data.................................. 395 Capacities .................................... 409 Index................................................. 419
Parts service ...................................... 396 Engine oils.................................... 412
Warranty coverage............................. 397 Engine oil additives ...................... 412
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 412
Information Booklet...................... 397 Brake fluid.................................... 412
Identification labels............................ 398 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 413
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 400 Gasoline additives ........................ 413
Engine................................................ 401 Fuel requirements ........................ 414
Rims and Tires ................................... 403 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Same size tires............................. 404 (C 230/C 230 Sport only)............ 414
Mixed size tires ............................ 405 Coolants....................................... 416
Minispare wheel ........................... 406 Windshield washer and
Electrical system................................ 407 headlamp cleaning system*......... 418
Main dimensions and weights............ 408
Main dimensions .......................... 408
Weights ........................................ 408
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies you will receive comprehensive informa-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, cations, and where proper installation will
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your care and operating procedures.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- Booklet are important documents and
dures. should be kept with the vehicle.

10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- Customer Assistance Center
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than One Mercedes Drive
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:

11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory-trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number Information Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to your au- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser- 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
vice. The service advisor will record each
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
service in the booklet for you. Customer Assistance Representatives is in your own interest that we can contact
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. you should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
Program Brochure in your vehicle literature able to the next operator.
portfolio.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual

Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our
European Delivery Program. For details,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
eign countries, please be aware that Center or write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

13
Introduction
Where to find it

This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-


vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed in your vehi- cle can be found in this section.
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance Indexes
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to signed to help you find information quickly
driver’s seat. you. and easily.
The following publications are part of your
Getting started Operation vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you 앫 this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle. provided as required depending on the
Practical hints equipment options installed in your
vehicle.
This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.

14
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks: The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual: you to follow.
앫 ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler. * Optional equipment is identified 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
® with an asterisk. Since standard in succession indicates a multiple-step
앫 HomeLink is a registered trademark
equipment varies between models, procedure.
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
the descriptions and illustrations in
Company. 컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
look for further information on a
앫 SIRIUS and related marks are trade- the actual equipment of your
topic.
marks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. vehicle.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
a procedure which is continued
Warning! G on the next page.
Warning notices draw your attention to haz- 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
ards that may endanger your health or life, a warning which is continued on
or the health or life of others. the next page.
-> This symbol is used to indicate
! Highlights hazards that may result in dam- cross-references to term defina-
age to your vehicle. tions.
i Helpful hints or further information you may Display Words appearing in the multi-
find useful. function display and audio dis-
play are printed in the type
shown here.

15
Introduction
Operating safety

Proper use of the vehicle


Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are may cause serious damage and impair the
interconnected, any modifications made operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
may produce an undesired effect on other sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
systems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety
down, and drive with caution to an area standards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the facility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
never turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.

16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9

17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects

For the USA only:


The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Reporting Safety Defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)


Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.

19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel

21
At a glance
Cockpit

22
At a glance
Cockpit

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 Cruise control lever 227 a Hood lock release 274 h Combination switch
2 Multifunction steering 26, b Steering wheel release 39 앫 Turn signals 50
wheel 122 handle (manual) 앫 Windshield wipers 51
3 Horn c Steering wheel adjustment 40 앫 High beam 50
4 Instrument cluster 24, stalk (electrical)*
j Exterior lamp switch 50,
118 d Parking brake pedal 48, 54 109
5 Overhead control panel 29 e Remote trunk opening 97 k Exterior rear view mirror 42,
6 Glove box lid release 237 switch adjustment 160
7 Glove box lock 237 f Door control panel 30 l Headlamp washer button* 160
8 Center console 27 g Parking brake release 48

9 Starter switch 32

23
At a glance
Instrument cluster

24
At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 Speedometer with: 앫 Program mode* 157 < Seat belt telltale 69,
v Electronic Stability 85, 앫 Status indicator (outside 120, 328
Program (ESP®) 327 temperature/digital 135 A High beam head- 50,
warning lamp speedometer) lamp indicator lamp 113
; Brake warning lamp, 48, 54, 앫 Digital clock 121 6 Fuel gauge with:
USA only 324 4 K Right turn signal 50 Fuel reserve warning lamp 328
3 Brake warning lamp, 48, 54, indicator lamp 4 The arrow indicates
Canada only 324 5 Tachometer with: 120 that the fuel filler cap
B Low beam headlamp 50, - Antilock Brake 82, is on the rear
indicator lamp 109 System (ABS) 322 right-hand side.
2 L Left turn signal 50 indicator lamp 7 Coolant temperature gauge 119
indicator lamp ú Engine malfunction 325, 8 Button for:
3 Multifunction display 121 indicator lamp, 326 앫 Resetting trip odometer 119
with: USA only
앫 Resetting all settings 131
앫 Trip odometer 119 ± Engine malfunction 325,
앫 Instrument cluster 118
앫 Main odometer 121 indicator lamp, 326
Canada only illumination
앫 Gear selector lever 47,
position* 121, 1 Supplemental 58,
153 Restraint System 330
(SRS) indicator lamp

25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel

Item Page Item Page


1 Multifunction display 121 4 Menu systems:
Operating control system 122 Press button

2 Selecting the submenu or è for next menu


setting the volume: ÿ for previous menu
Press button 5 Moving within a menu:
æ up/to increase Press button
ç down/to decrease j for next display
3 Telephone*: k for previous display
Press button
s to take a call
to dial a call
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call

i C 230 Sport and C 350 Sport:


Steering wheel in these vehicles will vary from
steering wheel shown. However, multifunction
steering wheel symbols and feature description
apply to Sport models as well.

26
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Seat heating*, driver’s side 106 8 Seat heating*, passenger 106
2 Rear window sunshade 162 side
switch* 9 Front passenger front 68,
3 ESP® control switch 85 air bag off indicator lamp 332,
339
4 Hazard warning flasher 115
switch – switching on/off a Audio system, 187

5 Central locking switch 100 or

Central unlocking switch 100 COMAND* (see separate


operating instructions)
6 Switch for folding back rear 103
seat head restraints b Automatic climate control* 174

7 Anti-theft alarm system 90 Climate control 164


indicator lamp* Rear window defroster 163

27
At a glance
Center console

Lower part Item Page


1 Ashtray 241
Cigarette lighter 242
2 Gear selector lever for 47,
automatic transmission* 153
Gearshift lever for manual 46,
transmission 149
3 Cup holder 239
4 Storage compartment/tele- 238
phone* compartment under
the center armrest
5 Program mode selector 157
switch for automatic
transmission*

28
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page
1 Rear interior lighting on/off 117
2 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 224
3 Right reading lamp on/off 117
4 Interior lighting control 116
5 Interior rear view mirror 42,
160
6 Garage door opener* 253
7 Hands-free microphone for 146,
Tele Aid* (emergency call 208,
system) and telephone* 247
8 Left reading lamp on/off 117
9 Tele Aid* (emergency call 247
system) button

29
At a glance
Door control panel

Item Page
1 Inside door handle 96
2 Memory function* (for 107
storing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel settings)
3 Switches for seat 34,
adjustment* 101
4 Switches for 221
opening/closing front door
windows
5 Rear door window override 80
switch
6 Switches for 221
opening/closing rear door
windows
7 Remote trunk lid switch 97

30
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

31
Getting started
Unlocking

The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor-
locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
The anti-theft alarm system* is
If you are already familiar with the basic disarmed.
functions described here, the “Controls in
왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
detail” section (컄 page 92) will provide you
SmartKey in the starter switch.
with further information. The correspond-
ing page references are located at the end For more information, see “Locking and
of each segment. unlocking” (컄 page 92).
SmartKey with remote control
Starter switch positions
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Opening button for trunk
3 ΠUnlock button Warning! G
4 Â Panic button* (컄 page 81)
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
i Canada only:
Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
button* 4. children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

32
Getting started
Unlocking

SmartKey 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical i Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
consumers) and driving position. The SmartKey can only be removed from the
All lamps (except low beam headlamp starter switch with the gear selector lever in
indicator lamp, high beam headlamp in- position P.
dicator lamp, and turn signal indicator i If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
lamps unless activated) in the instru- position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the no longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
instrument cluster fails to come on the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
when the ignition is switched on, have SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
a lamp in the instrument cluster re- starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
Starter switch mains on after starting the engine or ly charged.
0 For removing SmartKey comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps 앫 Check the battery and charge it if necessary
The steering is locked when the in instrument cluster” (컄 page 322). (컄 page 383).
SmartKey is removed from the starter 3 Starting position
앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 386).
switch. i When you switch on ignition, the indicator To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge
1 Power supply for some electrical and warning lamps (except low beam headlamp or a completely discharged battery, always re-
consumers, such as seat adjustment indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator move the SmartKey from the starter switch when
lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless ac- the engine is not in operation.
tivated) in the instrument cluster come on. The
indicator and warning lamps (except low beam
headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if
activated) will go out when the engine is running.
This indicates that the respective systems are
operational.

33
Getting started
Adjusting

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G


All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- Adjusting the seat while driving could cause SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
tening of seat belts, must be done before the driver to lose control of the vehicle. with you, and lock the vehicle.
the vehicle is put into motion. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Even with the SmartKey removed from the
back in an excessively reclined position as starter switch, the power seats* can be
Seats this can be dangerous. You could slide un- operated when the respective door is open.
der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide Therefore, do not leave children unattended
The seats can be adjusted either manually under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s domen or neck. That could cause serious or vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
equipment. fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts ment may cause an accident and/or serious
For more information, see “Seats” provide the best restraint when the wearer personal injury.
(컄 page 101). is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body. Your seat
must be adjusted so that you can correctly
fasten your seat belt (컄 page 43).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.

34
Getting started
Adjusting

Manual seat adjustment 왘 Allow handle 1 to reengage with an


Warning! G audible click.
왘 Check for proper engagement before
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the driving.
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend Seat cushion tilt
that children be placed in the rear seats 왘 Turn handwheel 2 forward or back-
whenever possible. Regardless of seating ward until your upper legs are lightly
position, children 12 years old and under supported.
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or 1 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat backrest tilt
booster seat recommended for the size and 2 Seat cushion tilt 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
weight of the child. For additional 3 Seat backrest tilt
information, see “Children in the vehicle” 왘 Press switch 3 in direction of arrow
4 Seat height
(컄 page 74). until your arms are slightly angled
when holding the steering wheel.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is Seat fore and aft adjustment
significantly increased if the child restraints
왘 Lift handle 1. Seat height
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in 왘 Slide seat to the desired position. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
the child restraint. Adjust seat to a comfortable seating 왘 Press switch 4 in direction of arrow
position that still allows you to reach until your legs are lightly supported.
! When moving the seats, make sure that the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
there are no items in the footwell or behind the The position should be as far rearward
seat. Otherwise you could damage the seats. as possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.

35
Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint height Head restraint adjusting


Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
1 Release button head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
Manually adjust the head restraint.
Raising: ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- 왘 Push or pull the head restraint cushion
dent. to the desired position.
왘 Manually adjust the height of the head
restraint by pulling it upward. i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
Lowering:
For more information, see “Seats”
왘 To lower the head restraint, push
(컄 page 101).
release button 1 and push down on
the head restraint.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.

36
Getting started
Adjusting

Power seat* adjustment i The memory function* (컄 page 107) lets Seat cushion tilt
you store the settings for the power seat*, the
The seat adjustment switches are located 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
steering wheel adjustment (electrical*) and the
on the respective front door. exterior rear view mirrors. arrow 3 until your upper legs are
lightly supported.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
Seat backrest tilt
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
왘 Press switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow 4.
direction of arrow 5 until your arms
Adjust seat to a comfortable seating are slightly angled when holding the
position that still allows you to reach steering wheel.
the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
The position should be as far rearward Seat height
as possible, consistent with ability to
1 Head restraint height 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
properly operate controls.
2 Seat height arrow 2.
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment Head restraint height
5 Seat backrest tilt 왘 Press switch up or down in direction of
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). arrow 1.

or i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that


it is as close to the head as possible.
왘 Open the respective door.

37
Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint adjusting Steering wheel


Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly Warning! G
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re- Do not adjust the steering wheel while
straint supports the back of the head at eye driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
level. This will reduce the potential for injury driving, or driving without the steering wheel
to the head and neck in the event of an ac- adjustment feature locked could cause the
cident or similar situation. driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
head restraints. Head restraints are
Manually adjust the head restraint. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
intended to help reduce injuries during an 왘 Push or pull the head restraint cushion with you, and lock the vehicle.
accident. to the desired position. Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the electrical steering wheel
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that adjustment feature* can be operated when
it is as close to the head as possible.
the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not
For more information, see “Seats” leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
(컄 page 101). with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
pervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.

38
Getting started
Adjusting

Steering wheel adjustment, manual The handle for steering wheel adjustment 왘 To lock the steering column, push
is located below the steering column. handle 1 all the way in until it
Warning! G engages.
The steering wheel is locked into posi-
Only adjust the steering wheel with the tion again.
vehicle at a standstill and make sure the
왘 Make sure the steering wheel is
steering column is securely locked in place
securely locked by trying to move it up
before driving off.
and down, and in and out before driving
Driving without the steering column locked off.
may cause an unexpected steering wheel
movement which could cause the driver to ! Do not drive the vehicle until you have prop-
erly locked the steering column.
lose control of the vehicle. Make sure the
1 Steering wheel adjustment release
steering column is securely locked by trying
handle
to move it up and down, and in and out be-
fore driving off. 왘 To unlock the steering column, pull
handle 1 out to its stop limit.
왘 Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (including mal-
function and indicator lamps) on the in-
strument cluster are clearly visible.

39
Getting started
Adjusting

Steering wheel adjustment, electrical* Adjusting steering column in or out


The stalk for the electrical steering wheel 왘 Move the stalk in direction of
Warning! G
adjustment is located on the lower left of arrows 1 until a comfortable steering You must make sure no one can become
the steering column. wheel position is reached with your trapped or injured by the moving steering
arms slightly bent at the elbow. wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
Adjusting steering column up or down
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
왘 Move the stalk in direction of the following:
arrows 2.
앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
Make sure your legs can move freely (컄 page 40).
and that all the displays (including mal- 앫 Press memory position switch*
function and indicator lamps) on the in- (컄 page 108).
strument cluster are clearly visible.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down Easy-entry/exit feature*
Children could open the driver’s door and
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). This feature allows for easier entry into and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
exit from the vehicle. When entering and feature, which could result in an accident
or exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in and/or serious personal injury.
왘 Open the driver’s door. its uppermost position.

i The memory function* (컄 page 107) lets The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
you store the settings for the power seat*, the ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub-
steering wheel adjustment (electrical*) and the menu of the control system (컄 page 144).
exterior rear view mirrors.

40
Getting started
Adjusting

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, i If the current position for the steering wheel Mirrors
the steering wheel will return to its last set is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
position when you: wheel will no longer be able to move upward Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. mirrors before driving so that you have a
앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted good view of the road and traffic condi-
switched on,
when the engine is started. tions.
or
앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter Warning! G Warning! G
switch with the driver’s door closed.
Let the system complete the adjustment In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
i The last set steering wheel position is stored procedure before setting the vehicle in mo- escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
when
tion. All steering wheel adjustments must be breaks.
앫 the ignition is switched off completed before setting the vehicle in mo- Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
앫 the position is stored in memory tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still low the liquid to come into contact with
(컄 page 107) adjusting could cause the driver to lose con- eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, trol of the vehicle. In case it does, immediately flush affected
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you: area with water, and seek medical help if
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter necessary.
switch,
or ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
앫 open the driver’s door with the removed while in their liquid state and by apply-
SmartKey in starter switch position 0 ing plenty of water.
or 1.

41
Getting started
Adjusting

Interior rear view mirror The buttons are located above the exterior ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
lamp switch. pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
mirror. it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
For more information, see “Rear view mir- place. The mirror housing is now properly posi-
rors” (컄 page 160). tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
Exterior rear view mirrors i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
Warning! G i The memory function* (컄 page 107) lets
you store the settings for the exterior rear view
Exercise care when using the passen- mirrors together with the settings for the steer-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror 1 Adjustment button ing wheel and the driver’s seat position.
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view For more information, see “Rear view mir-
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror mirror button rors” (컄 page 160).
are closer than they appear. Check your in- 3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
terior rear view mirror or glance over your button
shoulder before changing lanes. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
왘 Press button 3 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 2
for passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
왘 Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.

42
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-


sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an According to accident statistics, children
structing the pedals’ range of movement. accident. You and your passengers should are safer when properly restrained in the
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- always wear seat belts. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in If you are ever in an accident, your injuries ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still can be considerably more severe without that children be placed in the rear seats.
have sufficient clearance. your seat belt properly buckled. Without Regardless of seating position, children
During sudden driving or braking maneu- your seat belt buckled, you are much more 12 years old and under must be seated and
vers, the objects could get caught between likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be properly secured in an appropriate infant or
or beneath the pedals. You could then no ejected from it. You can be seriously injured toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
longer brake or accelerate. This could lead or killed. mended for the size and weight of the child.
to accidents and injury. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or For additional information, see “Children in
death is lessened if you are wearing your the vehicle” (컄 page 74).

Fastening the seat belt seat belt. The air bags can only provide the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
protection they were designed to afford if significantly increased if the child restraints
the occupants are using their seat belts are not properly secured in the vehicle
Warning! G (컄 page 69). and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear.

43
Getting started
Driving

왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt


Warning! G Warning! G from the belt outlet.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Read and observe the additional warning
than there are seat belts available. Be sure notices printed in the “Safety and Security” across the top of your shoulder and the
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly section (컄 page 62) and (컄 page 69). lap portion across your hips.
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never 왘 Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
use a seat belt for more than one person at it engages.
a time.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body. 1 Latch plate
2 Release button
3 Buckle

44
Getting started
Driving

Belt outlet height adjustment shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust Warning! G
the height of the belt outlet.
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible could tear.
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen. Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly This could damage the belt.
upright position.
Never attempt to make modifications to
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one seat belts. This could impair the effective-
person at a time. ness of the belts.
1 Release button
앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
왘 Press release button 1 and move the person and another object at the same severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
seat belt height adjuster upward or time. not be able to provide adequate protection.
downward.
앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
or toddler restraints or children in stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Proper use of seat belts
booster seats, always follow the child Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Do not twist the seat belt when fasten- seat manufacturer’s instructions. Center.
ing.
앫 Check your seat belt during travel to
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder make sure that it is properly posi-
portion is located as close as possible tioned.
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
앫 Make sure that the seat belt is always
not touch the neck). Never pass the
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.

45
Getting started
Driving

Starting the engine Manual transmission Starting


왘 Depress brake pedal.
Warning! G 왘 Make sure the gearshift lever is in
neutral position (no gear selected).
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
왘 Fully depress clutch pedal.
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- Otherwise the engine cannot be
consciousness and possible death. started due to the integrated safety
interlock.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ven- 왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
are entering the vehicle while driving, have For more information, see “Manual trans- to position 3 (컄 page 32) and hold until
the cause determined and corrected imme- mission” (컄 page 149). the engine starts.
diately. If you must drive under these condi-
tions, drive only with at least one window For information on turning off the engine,
fully open. see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 55).

46
Getting started
Driving

Automatic transmission* Starting Starting difficulties


왘 Place the gear selector lever in If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
position P. position 0 for an extended period of time,
it can no longer be turned in the switch. In
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
this case, the steering is locked.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
왘 To unlock, remove SmartKey from
to position 3 (컄 page 32) and release it
starter switch and reinsert.
again immediately. The engine then
starts automatically. If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
For information on turning off the engine,
Gearshift pattern for automatic
see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 55). 왘 Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
transmission position 0 and repeat the starting
procedure (컄 page 46).
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock Remember that extended starting
R Reverse gear attempts can drain the vehicle battery.
N Neutral position 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 386).
D Drive position
If the engine does not start after several
For more information, see “Automatic starting attempts, there could be a mal-
transmission*” (컄 page 151). function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

47
Getting started
Driving

Parking brake 왘 Release parking brake by pulling on i At vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
handle 1. (15 km/h), the automatic central locking system
engages and the locking knobs drop down.
The warning lamp ; (USA only)
Warning! G or 3 (Canada only) in the The automatic door lock feature can be deacti-
vated (컄 page 143).
instrument cluster goes out.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the You can open a locked door from the inside.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it Open door only when conditions are safe to do
Driving
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave so.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
Warning! G pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
could result in an accident and/or serious drivetrain wear.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
personal injury.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- speeds may shorten the service life of the
vent this type of loss of control. engine.

! If you hear a warning signal and the mes-


sage Release parking brake appears in the
multifunction display when driving off, you have
forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake (컄 page 48).

1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal

48
Getting started
Driving

Manual transmission Automatic transmission*



Warning! G
Depress the brake pedal. ! Wait for the gear selection process to com-
plete before setting the vehicle in motion.
왘 Fully depress the clutch pedal. It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
왘 Depress the brake pedal. ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
! In order to avoid damage to the transmis- er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
sion, place the gearshift lever to reverse gear 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D
only when the vehicle is stopped. on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
to drive forward, or to position R to
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
왘 Move gearshift lever to first gear to drive rearward.
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
drive forward, or to reverse gear to ! Place the gear selector lever in position P someone or something. Only shift into gear
drive rearward. or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to when the engine is idling normally and when
avoid damaging the transmission. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
왘 Simultaneously release the brake pedal
and slowly the clutch pedal. 왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal. pedal.

49
Getting started
Driving

Switching on headlamps High beam Turn signals


The combination switch is located on the
The combination switch is located on the
Low beam headlamps left of the steering column.
left of the steering column.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
Exterior lamp switch 2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
1 Off 왘 Push the combination switch in
왘 Press the combination switch in
2 Low beam headlamps on direction of arrow 1.
direction of arrow 1 or 2.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamps and the high
The corresponding turn signal indicator
position B. beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
lamp L or K in the instrument
the instrument cluster comes on
The low beam headlamps and the low cluster flashes (컄 page 24).
(컄 page 24).
beam headlamp indicator lamp B in
The combination switch resets
the instrument cluster comes on For more information on headlamps, see
automatically after major steering
(컄 page 24). “Lighting” (컄 page 109).
wheel movements.

50
Getting started
Driving

i If the combination switch is pressed to the ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when Intermittent wiping
point of resistance and released, the the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
corresponding turn signals will flash three times. a windshield might scratch the glass and/or ! Vehicles with rain sensor*:
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic
Windshield wipers car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wind-
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, al-
ways operate the windshield wipers with wind- shield wipers will operate in the presence of wa-
The combination switch is located on the ter sprayed on the windshield, and windshield
shield washer fluid (컄 page 52).
left of the steering column. wipers may be damaged as a result.
Switching on windshield wipers ! Vehicles with rain sensor*:
If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on the
왘 Turn the combination switch to the
surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may
desired position depending on the cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undes-
intensity of the rain. ired fashion. This could then damage the wind-
0 Windshield wipers off shield wiper blades or scratch the windows. You
should therefore switch off the windshield wip-
I Intermittent wiping ers when weather conditions are dry.
II Normal wiper speed Vehicles with rain sensor*:
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent
III Fast wiper speed
Combination switch on wetness of windshield.
1 Single wipe 왘 Turn the combination switch to
Wiping with windshield washer fluid position I.
2 Switching on windshield wipers
Vehicles with rain sensor*:
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by
the rain sensor.

51
Getting started
Driving

i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the Single wipe ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
opened. This protects persons getting into or out ly.
of the vehicle from being sprayed. direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
point. 앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
Intermittent wiping will be continued when location and remove SmartKey from starter
앫 all doors are closed The windshield wipers wipe one time switch before attempting to remove any
without washer fluid. blockage.
and
앫 Remove blockage.
앫 the clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again.
manual transmission)
왘 Press the combination switch in direc- If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with
or
tion of arrow 1 past the resistance combination switch in position I,
앫 the gear selector lever is in position D or R point. 앫 set the combination switch to the next high-
(vehicles with automatic transmission*)
The windshield wipers operate with er wiper speed
or
washer fluid. 앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the
앫 the wiper setting is changed using the com- nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
bination switch i To prevent smears on the windshield, or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind-
shield washer fluid every now and then even
when it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 280).

52
Getting started
Driving

Problems while driving The coolant temperature is In case of accident


above 248°F (120°C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
cooling the engine.
앫 An ignition cable may be damaged. cumstances.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
앫 The engine electronics may not be op- 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
soon as possible and turn off the en-
erating properly. ties.
gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool
앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered off. If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
the catalytic converter and damaged it. termined:
왘 Check the coolant level and add
왘 Give very little gas. coolant if necessary (컄 page 278). 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as If no damage can be determined on the
soon as possible. 앫 Major assemblies
앫 Fuel system
앫 Engine mount
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.

53
Getting started
Parking and locking

You have now completed your first drive.


You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G 앫 When parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
combustible materials such as grass, hay or to position 0 and remove.
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot 앫 Take the SmartKey with you and lock
exhaust system, as these materials could be the vehicle when leaving, which could
Vehicles with manual transmission: endanger other road users when you en-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before gage the parking brake.
removing the SmartKey from the starter To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when damage to the vehicle or the vehicle
Parking brake
the SmartKey is removed. drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement,
always do the following before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle:
Warning! G
Warning! G 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫 Manual transmission: Move the gear- Do not engage the parking brake while the
With the engine not running, there is no shift lever into neutral position (no gear vehicle is in motion. Doing so can cause the
power assistance for the brake and steering is selected). rear wheels to lock up. You could lose con-
system. In this case, it is important to keep 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. trol of the vehicle and cause an accident. In
in mind that a considerably higher degree of addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
앫 Manual transmission: Move the gear-
effort is necessary to brake and steer the light up when the parking brake is engaged,
shift lever into first or reverse gear.
vehicle. which could endanger other road users.
앫 Automatic transmission*: Move the
gear selector lever to position P.
앫 Slowly release brake pedal.

54
Getting started
Parking and locking

Turning off engine


access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake and/or
왘 Manual transmission: Move the gear-
move the gear selector lever* from
shift lever into first or reverse gear.
position P, either of which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury. 왘 Automatic transmission*: Place the
gear selector lever in position P.
Position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
cle from moving, possibly hitting people or 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 54).
objects. Always set the parking brake in ad-
dition to shifting to position P (컄 page 153)
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (manual transmission: first
1 Release handle (manual transmission: first or reverse gear or reverse gear).
2 Parking brake pedal (컄 page 149)).
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2. When parked on an incline, turn front wheel road curb.
towards the road curb.
When the engine is running, the brake 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
warning lamp ; (USA only) Getting out of your vehicle without taking to position 0 (컄 page 32).
or 3 (Canada only) in the the above measurements to secure it is
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
instrument cluster comes on. dangerous.
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
Switching off headlamps
Warning! G i Vehicles with automatic transmission: The
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M SmartKey can only be removed from the starter
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the (컄 page 50). switch with the gear selector lever in position P.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave For more information, see “Lighting”
children unattended in the vehicle, or with (컄 page 109).

55
Getting started
Parking and locking

Releasing seat belts Locking i If you hear a warning signal you have
forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
왘 Press the seat belt release button opening the driver’s door.
(컄 page 44). Warning! G In addition the message Switch off lights
Allow the retractor to completely appears in the multifunction display.
To prevent possible personal injury, always Switch off the headlamps.
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
keep hands and fingers away from the door
latch plate. 왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that cially careful when small children are the trunk.
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get around. 왘 Press lock button ‹ on the
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
Before closing doors, make sure there is no SmartKey (컄 page 32).
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or possibility of someone getting caught in a 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
cause damage to the door and/or door trim pan- door during closing. times.
el. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact Warning! G times.
For more information, see “Factory
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
setting” (컄 page 93).
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave move down.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
armed.
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious For more information, see “Locking and
personal injury. unlocking” (컄 page 92).

56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most im- Air bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
portant facts about the restraint system readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
앫 Front passenger front air bag off
components of the vehicle. lit when the engine is running.
indicator lamp (컄 page 68)
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 69) A malfunction in the system has been
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 77) Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 64) 앫 fails to go out after approximately
앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
4 seconds after the engine was started
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 79) Although independent systems, their pro-
tective effects work in conjunction with 앫 does not come on at all
Additional protection potential provide
each other.
앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
i For information on infants and children or while driving.
with
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
앫 Air bags (컄 page 59) systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 74). Warning! G
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors) The SRS system conducts a self-test when Modifications to or work improperly con-
the ignition is switched on and in regular ducted on restraint systems (such as seat
앫 Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
intervals while the engine is running. This belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
for seat belts (컄 page 72)
facilitates detection of system malfunc- devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
앫 Active head restraints (컄 page 73) tions. The 1 indicator lamp in the in- or their wiring, as well as tampering with in-
strument cluster comes on when the terconnected electronic systems, can lead
ignition is switched on and goes out no lat- to the restraint systems no longer function-
er than a few seconds after the engine has ing as intended.
been started.

58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Air bags
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
for example, could deploy inadvertently or creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
fail to deploy in accidents although the de-
celeration threshold for air bag deployment
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
Warning! G
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re- be performed by qualified technicians. Con-
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
tronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system pacts (front air bags) or side impacts (front
to accommodate a person with disabilities, side impact air bags, rear side impact
contact your local authorized air bags* and window curtain air bags).
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer However, no system available today can to-
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes tally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
comes on during driving or does not come The deployment of the air bags temporarily
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
recommend that you visit an authorized to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may porary breathing difficulty for people with
not deploy when needed in an accident, asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
which could result in serious or fatal injury, this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec- as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
essarily which could also result in injury. breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.

59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-


ble rearward, still permitting proper op-
앫 Occupants, especially children, should
always sit nearly upright, properly use
eration of vehicle controls. The distance the seat belts and use an appropriately
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast- sized infant or toddler restraint or boost-
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover er seat recommended for the size and
driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least weight of the child.
properly seated position and to wear their 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be Failure to follow these instructions can re-
respective seat belts. able to accomplish this by a combina-
sult in severe injuries to you or other
For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
occupants.
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
collision always be in normal seated position
lems, please see an authorized If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
Mercedes-Benz Center. you make the buyer aware of this safety in-
your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to formation. Be sure to give the buyer this
erly positioned on your body.
the steering wheel or dashboard. Operator’s Manual.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
on steering wheel position will help to keep side the rim can increase the risk and
you at a safe distance from the air bag. potential severity of hand/arm injury
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position when driver front air bag inflates.
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates possible rearward from the dashboard
with great force in the blink of an eye: when the seat is occupied.
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.

60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i Air bags are designed to deploy only in cer-


Warning! G (2) Always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts, and for
tain frontal impacts (front air bags) and in side
impacts (front side impact air bags, rear side im-
Accident research shows that the safest children 12 years old and under, use an pact air bags* and window curtain air bags)
place for children in an automobile is in the appropriately sized infant or toddler which exceed preset thresholds. Only during
rear seat. restraint or booster seat recommended these events will they provide their supplemental
for the size and weight of the child. protection.
There is a possibility for a side impact
(3) Always wear seat belts properly. The driver and passengers should always wear
air bag related injury if occupants, especial- their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
ly children, are not properly seated or re- If you believe that, even with the use of the air bags to provide their supplemental pro-
strained when next to a front side impact these guidelines, it would be safer for your tection.
air bag and/or rear side impact air bag* rear seat occupants to have the rear mount- In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-
which needs to deploy rapidly in a side im- ed side impact air bags* deactivated, then low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
pact in order to do its job. deactivation can be accomplished upon not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
your written request to do so at an autho- protected to the extent possible by a properly
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
follow these guidelines: is also needed to provide the best possible pro-
cost.
(1) Occupants, especially children, should tection in a rollover.
never place their bodies or lean their Please contact your local authorized
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
heads in the area of the door where the Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
front side impact air bag and/or the rear Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
It is important to your safety and that of your pas-
side impact air bag* inflates. This could (1-800-367-6372) for details.
sengers that you replace deployed air bags and
result in serious injuries or death should repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
the front side impact air bag and/or the that the vehicle will continue to provide supple-
rear side impact air bag* be deployed. mental crash protection for occupants.

61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt,


앫 No modifications of any kind may be 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
emergency tensioning device and made to any components or wiring of panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
air bag the SRS. This includes changing or keep both feet on the floor in front of the
removing any component or part of the seat.
Warning! G SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
앫 In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were inoperative or causing unintended air
cover, outboard sides of the front seat bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
highly stressed in an accident must be
backrests, door trim panels, or door therefore only be performed by qualified
replaced and their anchoring points
frame trims, and installation of addition- technicians. Contact an authorized
must also be checked. Only use belts in-
al electrical/electronic equipment on or Mercedes-Benz Center.
stalled or supplied by an authorized
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 For your protection and the protection
area between air bags and occupants
앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning de- free from objects (e.g. packages, purs- of others, when scrapping the air bag
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on es, umbrellas, etc.). unit or emergency tensioning device,
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD our safety instructions must be fol-
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers
that is deployed must be replaced. lowed. These instructions are available
from the coat hooks or handles over the from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges. door. These items may turn into projec- Center.
They could tear. tiles and cause head and other injuries
when the window curtain air bag is de- 앫 Given the considerable deployment
앫 Do not make any modification that could
ployed. speed, required inflation volume, and
change the effectiveness of the belts.
the textile structure of the air bags,
앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this 앫 Air bag system components will be hot there is the possibility of abrasions or
may severely weaken them. In a crash after an air bag has inflated. Do not other, potentially more serious injuries
they may not be able to provide ade- touch. resulting from air bag deployment.
quate protection.

62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When you sell your vehicle we strongly Driver and front passenger front air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts
urge you to give notice to the subsequent are deployed: which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
alerting them to the applicable section in ed by the fastened seat belts.
the Operator’s Manual. 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
The front passenger front air bag will only
threshold
be deployed if:
Front air bags 앫 independently of the front side impact
앫 the system, based on OCS weight sen-
air bags and/or the rear side impact
air bags* sor readings, senses that the front pas-
senger seat is occupied
i The front air bags in this vehicle have been 앫 the 56 indicator lamp in the
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are center console is not lit (컄 page 68)
based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera- 앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
tion as assessed by the air bag control unit. ment threshold
On the front passenger side, the front air bag de-
ployment is additionally influenced by the pas-
senger’s weight category as identified by the
1 Driver air bag Occupant Classification System (OCS)
2 Passenger air bag (컄 page 64).
The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for the second stage inflation of the air bag.

63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Front side impact air bags, rear side im- The front side impact air bags, the rear Occupant Classification System
pact air bags*, window curtain air bags side impact air bags*, and the window cur-
tain air bags are deployed: The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
front air bag on or off based on the classi-
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- fied occupant weight category determined
ment threshold by weight sensor readings from the front
앫 independently of the front air bags passenger seat.

The front side impact air bags, the rear i The system does not deactivate the front
side impact air bags*, and the window cur- passenger side impact air bag, the window cur-
tain air bag and the emergency tensioning
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts
device.
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
1 Window curtain air bag Occupants must sit properly belted in a po-
ment threshold.
2 Front side impact air bag sition that is as upright as possible with
3 Rear side impact air bag* their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
able to properly approximate the
occupant’s weight category.

64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i If your seat, including your trim cover and In the event of a collision, the air bag control When the OCS senses that the front passen-
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
unit will not allow front passenger front air ger seat occupant is classified as being
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. bag deployment when the OCS classified heavier than the weight of a typical
the front passenger seat occupant as being 12-month-old child seated in a standard
Only seat accessories approved by
up to or less than the weight of a typical child restraint or as being a small individual
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
12-month-old child in a standard child (such as a young teenager or a small adult),
Both driver and the front passenger should restraint or if the front passenger seat is the 56 indicator lamp will illuminate
always use the 56 indicator lamp sensed as being empty. for approximately 6 seconds when the en-
as an indication of whether or not the front gine is started and then, depending on occu-
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
passenger is properly positioned. pant weight sensor readings from the seat,
ger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical remain illuminated or go out. With the
Warning! G 12-month-old child in a standard child 56 indicator lamp illuminated, the
restraint, the 56 indicator lamp will front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates illuminate when the engine is started and re- With the 56 indicator lamp out, the
when an adult or someone larger than a main illuminated, indicating that the front front passenger front air bag is activated.
small individual is in the front passenger passenger front air bag is deactivated. When the OCS senses that the front passen-
seat, have the front passenger re-position ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
himself or herself in the seat until the someone larger than a small individual, the
ger seat is classified as being empty, the
56 indicator lamp goes out. 56 indicator lamp will illuminate for
56 indicator lamp will illuminate
More information about air bag display when the engine is started and remain approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
messages (컄 page 332). illuminated, indicating that the front started and then go out, indicating that the
passenger front air bag is deactivated. front passenger front air bag is activated. 컄컄

65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

컄컄
If the 56 indicator lamp is
illuminated, the front passenger front air
Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. According to accident statistics, children important information when circumstances
If the 56 indicator lamp is not are safer when properly restrained in the require you to place a child in the front
illuminated, the front passenger front air rear seating positions than in the front seat- passenger seat:
bag is activated and will be deployed: ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
that children be placed in the rear seats technology designed to turn off the front
앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
whenever possible. Regardless of seating passenger front air bag in your vehicle
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment when the system senses the weight of a
position, children 12 years old and under
threshold typical 12-month-old child or less along
must be seated and properly secured in an
앫 independently of the front side impact with the weight of a standard appropri-
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
air bags and/or rear side impact air ate child restraint on the front passen-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
bags*. ger seat.
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
If the front passenger front air bag is
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious-
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
influenced by:
and top tether strap, fully in accordance senger front air bag inflates in a collision
앫 the rate of vehicle deceleration as as- with the child seat manufacturer’s which could occur under some circum-
sessed by the air bag control unit instructions. stances, even with the air bag technolo-
앫 front passenger’s weight category as gy installed in your vehicle. The only
identified by the Occupant Classification means to completely eliminate this risk
System (OCS). is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.

66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

앫 If you must install a rear-facing child 앫 If you have to place a child in a i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
restraint on the front passenger seat forward-facing child restraint on the not mean that the front passenger front air bag
because circumstances require you to front passenger seat, move the seat as also should have deployed.
do so, make sure that the 56 in- far back as possible, use the proper The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 64)
dicator lamp is illuminated, indicating child restraint recommended for the may have determined:
that the front passenger front air bag is age, size and weight of the child, and 앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the
deactivated. Should the 56 indi- secure child restraint with the vehicle’s weight up to or less than that of a typical
cator lamp not illuminate or go out while seat belt according to the child seat 12-month-old child seated in a standard
the restraint is installed, please check manufacturer’s instructions. For child restraint - both instances where the
installation. Periodically check the children larger than the typical system suppresses deployment of the front
56 indicator lamp while driving 12-month-old child, the front passenger passenger front air bag even though the im-
to make sure the 56 indicator front air bag may or may not be pact met the criteria and was of sufficient
lamp is illuminated. If the 56 in- activated (컄 page 65). severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
dicator lamp goes out or remains out, do 앫 that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
not transport a child on the front pas- ual (such as a young teenager or a small
senger seat until the system has been adult) or a child weighing more than the
repaired. A child in a rear-facing child re- weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
straint on the front passenger seat will standard child restraint - instances where
be seriously injured or even killed if the the system may suppress deployment of the
front passenger front air bag inflates. front passenger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
cient severity to deploy the driver front air
bag.

67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

The 56 indicator lamp is located in


the center console. Warning! G 앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
56 indicator lamp are lit at the same 앫 Read and observe all warnings in this
time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant chapter.
Classification System. The front passenger
front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Self-test Occupant Classification
System
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
bag system and OCS: After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2, the
앫 Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians. 56 indicator lamp located in the
1 Front passenger front air bag off Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center console illuminates. If an adult oc-
indicator lamp Center. cupant is properly sitting on the front pas-
senger seat and the system senses the
The 56 indicator lamp 1 will be 앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat occupant as being an adult, the
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
backrest. 56 indicator lamp will illuminate
removed from the starter switch or with
and go out after approximately 6 seconds.
the starter switch in position 0. 앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
self from the seat by using the handle If the seat is not occupied and the system
over the door as this may cause the OCS senses the front passenger seat as being
to be unable to correctly approximate empty, the 56 indicator lamp will
the occupant weight category. illuminate and not go out.

68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Seat belts
Warning! G Warning! G
The use of seat belts and infant and child
If the 56 indicator lamp should not restraint systems is required by law in all Always fasten your seat belt before driving
illuminate, the system is not functioning. 50 states, the District of Columbia, the off. Always make sure all of your passengers
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. are properly restrained, including those sit-
Center before seating any child on the front ting in the rear.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
passenger seat. Failure to wear and properly fasten and
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in position your seat belt greatly increases
More information can be found in the motion. your risk of injuries and their likely severity
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 332). in an accident. You and your passengers
For more information, see “Fastening the should always wear seat belts.
seat belt” (컄 page 43).
Warning! G If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
i For information on infants and children trav- can be considerably more severe without
Never place anything between seat cushion eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys- your seat belt properly buckled. Without
tems for infants and children, see “Children in
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces your seat belt buckled, you are much more
the vehicle” (컄 page 74).
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi- likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
cation System. The bottom of the child seat ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
must make full contact with the passenger or killed.
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
seat could cause injuries to the child in case death is lessened if you are properly wearing
of an accident, instead of increasing protec- your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
tion for the child. they are designed if the occupants are
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for properly wearing their seat belts.
installation of child seats.

69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G


Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
backrest in an excessively reclined position stressed in an accident must be replaced 앫 Seat belts can only work when used
as this can be dangerous. You could slide and their anchoring points must also be properly. Never wear seat belts in any
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide checked. other way than as described in this
under it, the belt would apply force at the Only use seat belts which have been section, as that could result in serious
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious approved by Mercedes-Benz. injuries in case of an accident.
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat
seat belt provide the best restraint when the Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belts. This can lead to unintended activation
reduce the likelihood of and potential
belt is properly positioned on the body. of the ETDs or to their failure to activate severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
when necessary. ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may system includes SRS (driver air bag,
Warning! G severely weaken them. In a crash they may passenger front air bag, front side im-
pact air bags, rear side impact air bags*,
not be able to provide adequate protection.
window curtain air bags for side win-
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Have all work carried out only by qualified dows), ETD (seat belt emergency ten-
than there are seat belts available. Make technicians. Contact an authorized sioning device), and front seat knee
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor- Mercedes-Benz Center. bolsters. The system is designed to en-
rectly restrained with a separate seat belt. hance the protection offered to properly
Never use a seat belt for more than one belted occupants in certain frontal (front
person at a time. air bags and ETD)

70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Enhanced seat belt reminder system


and side (front side impact air bags, rear 앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
side impact air bags*, window curtain crash, you wouldn’t have the full width When the engine is started, the seat belt
air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed of the belt to distribute impact forces. telltale < will always illuminate
preset deployment thresholds. The twisted belt against your body could for 6 seconds to remind you and your pas-
cause injuries. sengers to fasten your seat belts.
앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your
앫 Pregnant women should also always use
arm, against your neck or off your shoul- If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
der. In a frontal crash, your body would a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible when the engine is started, an additional
move too far forward. That would warning chime will also sound for a maxi-
increase the chance of head and neck on the hips to avoid any possible
pressure on the abdomen. mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s
injuries. The belt would also apply too
seat belt is fastened.
much force to the ribs or abdomen, 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
which could severely injure internal or- panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
gans such as your liver or spleen. keep both feet on the floor in front of the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable seat. passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
objects in or on your clothing, such as 앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant with front doors closed,
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these or toddler restraints or children in
앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illu-
might cause injuries. booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions. minated for as long as either the driv-
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
on your hips and not across the abdo-
fastened.
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
in a crash. 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one telltale < starts flashing and a
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat warning chime sounds with increasing
belt around a person and another
person or other objects.

71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds For more information, see “Practical hints” When activated, emergency tensioning
or until the driver’s and the front pas- (컄 page 328). devices remove slack from the belts. Belt
senger’s seat belt are fastened. force limiters reduce the force exerted by
If you and/or your passenger release Emergency tensioning device (ETD), the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
the seat belt during driving, the seat seat belt force limiter
belt telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds as described be-
The seat belts for the front and rear outer Warning! G
seats are equipped with emergency
fore. An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s was activated must be replaced.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
seat belt remains unfastened after When disposing the emergency tensioning
following cases:
60 seconds, the warning chime stops device, our safety instructions must be
sounding, the seat belt telltale < 앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts
followed. These are available at your
stops flashing but continues to be illu- exceeding the system deployment
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
minated. threshold.
After a vehicle standstill the warning 앫 if the restraint systems are operational
chime is reactivated and the seat belt and functioning correctly, see
telltale < is flashing again if the ve- 1 indicator lamp (컄 page 58).
hicle speed once exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h). i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened
The seat belt telltale < will only go out (latch plate properly inserted into buckle).
if both the driver’s and the front passen- The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
is standing still and a front door is opened.

72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Active head restraint You cannot remove the active head re-
potential for injury to the head and neck in
straints on the driver’s and front passen-
the event of an accident or similar situation.
The active front seat head restraints are in- ger’s seat.
tended to offer the driver and front passen- Do not drive the vehicle without the seat For removal of the active head restraints
ger increased protection from whiplash head restraints. Head restraints are intend- we recommend that you contact an
type injuries in rear-end collisions. In the ed to help reduce injuries during an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
event of a rear-end collision exceeding the accident.
For information on head restraint adjust-
systems’ deployment threshold, the active
ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 34).
head restraints on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats are designed to move Warning! G For information on resetting the activated
forward in the direction of travel, providing active head restraints, see “Resetting acti-
the head with increased support earlier on Only use seat or head restraint covers which vated head restraints” (컄 page 365).
in the collision sequence. The active head have been tested and approved by
restraints activate whether the seat is oc- Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
cupied or not. Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact an
Warning! G authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints. Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the ac-
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
tive head restraints may not be able to func-
close to the head as possible and the center
tion properly or offer the intended degree of
of the head restraint supports the back of
protection in the event of an accident.
the head at eye level. This will reduce the

73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems


If children open a door, they could
앫 injure other persons We recommend all infants and children be
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
properly restrained at all times while the
the vehicle: 앫 get out of the car and injure themselves
vehicle is in motion.
왘 Secure the child using an infant or child or be injured by oncoming traffic
Do not expose the child restraint system to All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
restraint appropriate to the age and
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s seat belt have special seat belt retractors
size of the child.
metal parts, for example, could become very for secure fastening of child restraints.
왘 Make sure that the infant or child is
hot, and the child could be burned on these To fasten a child restraint, follow child
properly secured at all times while the
parts. restraint instructions for mounting. Then
vehicle is in motion.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the pull the shoulder belt out completely and
passenger compartment or trunk unless let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
Warning! G they are firmly secured in place. For more in- ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
formation, see “Loading” (컄 page 230), and that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
Do not leave children unattended in the vated. The belt is now locked. Push down
see “Useful features” (컄 page 237) in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child on child restraint to take up any slack.
“Controls in detail ” chapter.
restraint system. The children could
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle let seat belt retract completely. The seat
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
앫 be seriously or fatally injured through of belt can again be used in the usual
excessive exposure to extreme heat or manner.
cold 앫 strong braking maneuvers
앫 sudden changes of direction
앫 an accident

74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

! A statement by the child restraint manufac-


Warning! G turer of compliance with these standards can be Warning! G
found on the instruction label on the restraint
Never release the seat belt buckle while the and in the instruction manual provided with the According to accident statistics, children
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat restraint. are safer when properly restrained in the
belt retractor will be deactivated. When using any infant, or toddler restraint, or rear seating positions than in the front seat-
booster seat, be sure to carefully read and follow ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
all manufacturer’s instructions for installation that children be placed in the rear seats
i Information on child seats with anchor fit- and use. whenever possible. Regardless of seating
tings for tether anchorages (컄 page 77).
Please read and observe warning labels affixed position, children 12 years old and under
For information on LATCH-type child seat an- to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child must be seated and properly secured in an
chors (컄 page 79). restraints. appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
! The use of infant or child restraints is mended for the size and weight of the child.
required by law in all 50 states, the District of
The infant or child restraint must be properly
Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all Canadian
provinces. secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
Infants and small children should be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system prop- and top tether strap, fully in accordance
erly secured in accordance with the manufactur- with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
er's instructions for the child restraint, that tions.
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Occupants, especially children, should nev-
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
er place their bodies or lean their heads in
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
the area of the door where the front side im-
pact air bag and/or the rear side impact
air bag* inflates. This could result in serious
injuries or 컄컄

75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

컄컄
death should the air bag be triggered. Al- air bag technology installed in your vehi- do not transport a child on the front pas-
ways sit nearly upright, properly use the cle. The only means to completely elim- senger seat until the system has been
seat belts and use an appropriately sized in- inate this risk is to never place a child in repaired. A child in a rear-facing child re-
fant or toddler restraint or booster seat rec- a rear-facing child restraint in the front straint on the front passenger seat will
ommended for the size and weight of the seat. We therefore strongly recommend be seriously injured or even killed if the
child. that you always place a child in a front passenger front air bag inflates.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by rear-facing child restraint in the back 앫 If you have to place a child in a
an inflating air bag. Note the following seat. forward-facing child restraint on the
important information when circumstances 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child front passenger seat, move the seat as
require you to place a child in the front pas- restraint on the front passenger seat far back as possible, use the proper
senger seat: because circumstances require you to child restraint recommended for the
do so, make sure that the age, size and weight of the child, and
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
56 indicator lamp is illuminated,
technology designed to turn off the front indicating that the front passenger front seat belt according to the child seat
passenger front air bag in your vehicle air bag is deactivated. Should the manufacturer’s instructions. For
when the OCS senses the weight of a 56 indicator lamp not illuminate children larger than the typical
typical 12-month-old child or less along or go out while the restraint is installed, 12-month-old child, the front passenger
with the weight of a standard please check installation. Periodically front air bag may or may not be activat-
appropriate child restraint on the front check the 56 indicator lamp ed (컄 page 65).
passenger seat. while driving to make sure the
앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on 56 indicator lamp is illuminated.
the front passenger seat will be If the 56 indicator lamp goes out
seriously injured or even killed if the or remains out,
front passenger front air bag inflates in
a collision which could occur under
some circumstances, even with the

76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Installation of infant and child restraint


Warning! G When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
systems

Infants and small children should never the seat belt to prevent the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with tether
share a seat belt with another occupant. from becoming a projectile in the event of anchorages for a top tether strap at each
During an accident, they could be crushed an accident. of the rear seating positions.
between the occupant and seat belt. Do not leave children unattended in the
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
significantly increased if the child restraints child restraint system. Unsupervised
are not properly secured in the vehicle children in a child restraint system may use
and/or the child is not properly secured in vehicle equipment and may cause an acci-
the child restraint. dent and/or serious personal injury.

Children too big for a toddler restraint must


ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be 1 Cover of top anchorage ring
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
왘 Make sure the rear backrest is locked
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
in its upright position (컄 page 235). 컄컄
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.

77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

컄컄 i For safety, make sure the hook 2 has


Warning! G attached to the anchorage ring 3 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
attached, the child restraint itself can be
sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
secured. Secure the child restraint and
use. Check for secure locking by pushing
tighten the top tether strap according to
and pulling on the backrest.
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage
왘 Reinstall cover 1 after removing the
ring 3. 2 Hook
3 Anchorage ring tether strap.
왘 Guide tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back. 왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
Head restraint must be installed and of the tether strap, to anchorage
positioned such that the top tether ring 3.
strap can pass freely between the head
restraint and top of seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.

78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Child seat anchors – LATCH-type LATCH-type anchors


The child seat must be firmly attached to the
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH- right and left side anchors 1. The LATCH-type anchors are located be-
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) An incorrectly mounted child seat may come tween the seat cushion and the backrest.
type anchors (at each of the outer rear loose during an accident which could result
seats) for the installation of a LATCH-type in serious injury or death to the child.
child seat with the matching mounting
fittings. Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat anchor fittings must be replaced.

Warning! G Do not leave children unattended in the


vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
Children too big for a toddler restraint must child restraint system.
ride in seats using regular seat belts.
Position shoulder belt across chest and i With a child seat installed in the left rear
shoulder, not face or neck. seat, the seat belt for the center seat occupied 1 Anchors
by a passenger must operate freely. Guide seat
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve 왘 Install child seat according to the
belt between its seat cushion mount and back-
proper belt positioning for children over rest mount along outside of right side child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
41 lbs until they reach a height where a anchor.
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster. i Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be
used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
Install child seat according to manufactur- seat belt system. Install child seat according to
er’s instructions. the manufacturer’s instructions.

79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Blocking of rear door window operation Activating override switch


Warning! G 왘 Slide override switch 3 to the right in
You can block the rear door window
Activate the override switch when children direction 2.
operation (for instance when you have
children riding in the rear passenger are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The rear door windows can no longer
compartment). The children may otherwise injure them- be operated using the respective
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win- switch located in the rear doors.
The override switch is located on the door
dow opening.
control panel of the driver’s door. i Operation of the rear door windows with the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the switches located on the door control panel of the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it driver’s door is still possible.
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with Deactivating override switch
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
왘 Slide override switch 3 to the left in
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
direction 1.
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury. The rear door windows can be operated
again using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
1 Deactivating override switch For more information, see “Power win-
2 Activating override switch dows” (컄 page 221).
3 Override switch

80
Safety and Security
Panic alarm*
왔 Panic alarm*
i USA only: Activating
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 왘 Press and hold button  for at least
two conditions: 1 second.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- An audible alarm and flashing exterior
ence, and
lamps will operate briefly.
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may Deactivating
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device 왘 Press button  again.
1 Â button could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. or
i Canada only: 왘 Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm i Canada only:
system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
button 1. Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.

81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

In this section you will find information on ABS


the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) accidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
Traction System) 앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
The ABS, BAS, ESP®, and 4MATIC (if so effectiveness.
equipped) cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
prevailing road and weather conditions. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®, and 4MATIC (if The ABS is functional above a speed of
so equipped) is only achieved with winter tires approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) indepen-
(컄 page 308), or snow chains as required. dent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.

82
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Braking Emergency brake maneuver


At the instant one of the wheels is about to 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the
Warning! G
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
the regulating mode.
Warning! G it increase braking or steering efficiency
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the beyond that afforded by the condition of the
brake pedal while experiencing the When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS vehicle brakes and tires or the traction avail-
pulsation. and the ESP® are also switched off. The ba- able on the road surface. The ABS cannot
sic driving and braking functions are still prevent accidents, including those resulting
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
available from excessive speed in turns, following an-
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
namely braking power and ability to steer
may lock during hard braking, reducing Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
the vehicle.
steering capability and extending the brak- prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
The pulsating brake pedal can be an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploit-
ing distance.
indication of hazardous road conditions ed in a reckless or dangerous manner which
and functions as a reminder to take extra could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
care while driving. safety of others.

For more information, see the “Practical


hints” section (컄 page 322).

83
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

BAS
Warning! G Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys- The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically tem is still functioning normally, but without physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- the additional brake boost available that it increase braking efficiency beyond that
tially reducing the braking distance. BAS would normally provide in an emergen- afforded by the condition of the vehicle
cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure
distance may increase. cannot prevent accidents, including those
until the emergency braking situation is
resulting from excessive speed in turns,
over.
following another vehicle too closely, or
The ABS will prevent the wheels from hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
locking. skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
When you release the brake pedal, the capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
brakes function again as normal. The BAS never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
is then deactivated. ous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.

84
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

ESP®
Warning! G Warning! G
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is run- Never switch off the ESP® when you see the The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
(force of adhesive friction between the instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as it increase the traction afforded by the exist-
tires and the road surface) and handling. follows: ing road and tire conditions. The ESP®
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle cannot prevent accidents, including those
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
as possible. resulting from excessive speed in turns or
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
applying the brakes to the appropriate 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
wheel and by limiting the engine output, tor.
capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle
the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
The ESP® is especially useful while driving the prevailing road conditions.
gerous manner which could jeopardize the
off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. Failure to observe these guidelines could user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during cause the vehicle to skid.
braking and steering maneuvers.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
The ESP® warning lamp v in the ing from excessive speed.
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.

85
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: Electronic traction system Switching off the ESP®
®
Because the ESP operates automatically, the
The electronic traction system is a
engine must be turned off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1) when component of ESP®. Warning! G
앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake The electronic traction system improves
The ESP® should not be switched off during
test dynamometer the vehicle’s ability to utilize available
normal driving other than in the circum-
앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle traction, especially under slippery road
stances described below. Disabling of the
raised conditions by applying the brakes to a
system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
Active braking action through the ESP® may spinning wheel.
dard driving maneuvers.
otherwise seriously damage the brake system. When you switch off the ESP®, the
Do not switch off the ESP® when a
For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see electronic traction system is still enabled.
Minispare wheel is mounted.
“Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
with the ESP® ” (컄 page 88).
Warning! G To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
i The ESP® will only function properly if you the ESP® in driving situations where it
use wheels of the recommended tire size If you are driving too fast, the electronic
(컄 page 403). would be advantageous to have the drive
traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
For more information, see the “Practical accident.
better grip such as:
hints” section (컄 page 327) and The electronic traction system cannot pre-
(컄 page 335). 앫 when driving with snow chains
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle. 앫 in deep snow
앫 in sand or gravel
! Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.

86
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

When you switch off the ESP® The ESP® switch is located on the center
앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
console. Warning! G
앫 the engine output is not limited, which When the ESP® warning lamp v is
allows the drive wheels to spin and illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
thus cut into surfaces for better grip switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
앫 the traction control will still apply the
driving maneuvers reduces.
brakes to a spinning wheel
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
앫 the ESP® continues to operate when
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
you are braking
status of the ESP®.
앫 you cannot activate the cruise control
1 ESP® switch
앫 the cruise control switches off if ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
currently activated 왘 With the engine running, press ESP® extended period with the ESP® switched off. This
switch 1 until the ESP® warning may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or lamp v in the instrument cluster which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn- Limited Warranty.
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes. comes on.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve- The ESP® is switched off. Switching on the ESP®
hicle.
왘 Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with ESP® switched on.

87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Four wheel electronic traction system


Failure to observe these guidelines could ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
(4MATIC) with the ESP® the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
cause the vehicle to skid.
switch position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
Models with all-wheel-drive only. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result- being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
ing from excessive speed. Active braking action through the ESP® may
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to
otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle
use available traction, e.g. during winter
brake system.
operation in mountains under snowy ! Do not tow with one axle raised.
conditions, by applying power to all four Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, Operational tests with the engine running can
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
wheels.
Limited Warranty.
i At highly demanding operating conditions,
Warning! G ! Performance testing must only be conduct- the electronic traction system may temporarily
switch off to prevent overheating of the drive
ed on a two-axle dynamometer.
wheel brakes. The message unavailable
If you see the ESP® warning lamp v Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, See Operator’s Manual will then appear in
flashing in the instrument cluster, proceed which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz the multifunction display while the ESP® warning
as follows: Limited Warranty. lamp v is flashing. The ESP® is still function-
ing normally.
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions

88
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system* The alarm system will also be triggered
when
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized Once the alarm system has been armed, a
앫 opening the vehicle with the
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
mechanical key
someone opens
Activating 앫 someone opens a door from the inside
앫 a door
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 앫 someone opens the trunk with the
앫 the trunk
switch. emergency release button
앫 the hood
Deactivating
i If the alarm stays on for more than
The alarm will stay on even if the activating 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). element (e. g. a door) is immediately tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system*
closed. (컄 page 247) provided Tele Aid service was
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the subscribed to and properly activated, and that
immobilizer. necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the ve- available.
hicle’s battery is charged), the system is not op-
erational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

89
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Arming the alarm system 왘 Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey. Disarming the alarm system
The indicator lamp is in the center console. The turn signal lamps flash three times 왘 Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
and an acoustic signal sounds three
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
times, to indicate that the alarm sys-
acoustic signal sounds once, to
tem is armed.
indicate that the alarm system is dis-
Indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after armed.
approximately 30 seconds after arming
the alarm system. i The alarm system will rearm automatically
after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three nor the trunk lid was opened.
times, one of the following elements may not be
properly closed: Canceling the alarm
1 Indicator lamp 앫 a door To cancel the alarm:
앫 the trunk
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
Close the respective element and lock the vehi- SmartKey.
cle again.
or
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.

90
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission*
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features

91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and
find detailed information on how to oper- unlocking, see “Getting started”
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- (컄 page 32) and (컄 page 54).
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section SmartKey
will be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are The locking tabs for the mechanical key
given at the beginning of each segment. portion of the two SmartKeys are a SmartKey with remote control
different color to help distinguish each 1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey unit. 2 Š Opening button for trunk
The SmartKey provides an extended oper- (컄 page 95)
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is 3 Mechanical key locking tab
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when 4 ΠUnlock button
you are in close proximity to it. 5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button* (컄 page 81)
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
i Canada only:
앫 the doors Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm
앫 the trunk system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic
button 6.
앫 the fuel filler flap
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex-
posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro-
magnetic radiation.

92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i Canada only: 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s


Warning! G This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry door (컄 page 362) and the trunk
Canada. Operation is subject to the following (컄 page 99).
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the two conditions: 앫 Have the vehicle battery and the battery con-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it (1) This device may not cause interference, and nections checked (컄 page 383).
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
(2) this device must accept any interference
children unattended in the vehicle, or with received, including interference that may Roadside Assistance or an authorized
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible cause undesired operation of the device. Mercedes-Benz Center.
for children to open a locked door from the
Any unauthorized modification to this device
inside, which could result in an accident Factory setting
could void the user’s authority to operate the
and/or serious personal injury. equipment. i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
i You can also open or close the windows and acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If you
i USA only: the tilt/sliding sunroof* using the SmartKey
wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal
This device complies with Part 15 of the (컄 page 223).
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
two conditions: ! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi- Center.
cle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is Global unlocking
malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
(2) this device must accept any interference 왘 Press button Œ.
앫 Try second SmartKey.
received, including interference that may 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
cause undesired operation. 앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(컄 page 95) and replace them if necessary 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
(컄 page 366).
could void the user’s authority to operate the 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
equipment. 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv-
move up.
er’s door (컄 page 361) and the trunk
(컄 page 362). 앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-
armed.

93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

The vehicle will lock again automatically Selective setting Global unlocking
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system*
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press button Œ twice.
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
to reprogram the SmartKey so that press-
locking if: 앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
ing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s
앫 neither door nor trunk is opened door and the fuel filler flap. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
starter switch simultaneously for about 5 seconds un- move up.
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 92) 앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-
앫 the central locking switch is not
flashes twice. armed.
activated
The SmartKey will then function as
Global locking follows: Global locking
왘 Press button ‹. 왘 Press button ‹.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
앫 All turn signal lamps flash three flap With the trunk and all doors closed:
times. 앫 All turn signal lamps flash three
왘 Press button Œ once.
앫 An acoustic signal sounds three times.
앫 All turn signal lamps flash once.
times. 앫 An acoustic signal sounds three
앫 An acoustic signal sounds once. times.
앫 The locking knobs in the doors
move down. 앫 The locking knob in the driver’s 앫 The locking knobs in the doors
door moves up. move down.
앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is
armed. 앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is dis- 앫 The anti-theft alarm system* is
armed. armed.

94
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Restoring to factory setting Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
you should do the following:
til Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 92) Battery check lamp (컄 page 92) comes
flashes twice. on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
batteries are in order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Unlocking and opening the trunk 왘
! If the battery check lamp does not come on Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
You can unlock and open the trunk briefly during check, then the SmartKey batter- mechanical key immediately to your
separately. ies are discharged. car insurance company.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 366). 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid. You can obtain the required batteries at any necessary.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Press button Š until trunk lid Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
unlocks and begins to open. i If the batteries are checked within signal will be glad to supply you with a
range of the vehicle, pressing the ‹ or Œ replacement.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat- button will lock or unlock the vehicle
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over- accordingly.
head clearance.

i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked


separately (컄 page 99).
The trunk can also be opened from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emer-
gency release” (컄 page 98).

95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Opening the doors from the inside Front doors Opening the trunk
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
respective front door to open door.
Warning! G
are safe to do so. If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up. Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility,
i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot- exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door. interior.

In addition the message Switch off lights


appears in the multifunction display. You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta-
Switch off the headlamps. tionary.
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
Rear doors (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
1 Locking knob 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
2 Inside door handle respective rear door to unlock door. ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance.
왘 Pull on door handle 2 on the
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
with the SmartKey, opening a door from the respective rear door to open door.
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.

96
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk from the outside Opening the trunk from the inside Closing the trunk

1 Handle 1 Remote trunk opening switch


1 Handle
왘 Press and hold button Š on the 왘 Press remote trunk opening switch 1 2 Handles
SmartKey until trunk unlocks and be- until the trunk begins to open.
왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
gins to open. The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in handle 1 or handles 2.
or remote trunk opening switch 1 comes
왘 Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
on and remains lit until the trunk is
왘 Pull on handle 1. on the trunk lid.
closed.
The vehicle must be unlocked.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄 page 99).
Warning! G
separately (컄 page 99).
i The trunk can also be opened be opened us- To prevent possible personal injury, always
i The trunk can also be opened from its inside ing button Š on the SmartKey or from its in- keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency re- side in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency opening when closing the trunk. 컄컄
lease” (컄 page 98). release” (컄 page 98).

97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

컄컄 Trunk emergency release ! The trunk lid swings open upwards


Be especially careful when small children
automatically.
are around.
With the emergency release button, the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Illumination of the emergency release
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it button:
The emergency release button is located
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave 앫 The button flashes 30 minutes after
on the inside of the trunk lid.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with opening the trunk.
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
앫 The button flashes 60 minutes after
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
closing the trunk.
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury. i The emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
or in motion.
Warning! G i The emergency release button does not
open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is dis-
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among charged or disconnected.
other dangers such as a blocked visibility,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle 1 Emergency release button i If the vehicle has previously been locked
interior. with the SmartKey, opening the trunk from the
왘 Briefly press emergency release
inside using the emergency release button will
button 1. trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
trunk. You may lock yourself out. opens. 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
i If the vehicle was previously centrally SmartKey.
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
closing it. The turn signals will flash three times
to confirm locking.

98
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Valet locking 왘 Turn the mechanical key clockwise to Automatic central locking
position 2 and remove the mechani-
i To deny any unauthorized person access to cal key in that position to lock the The doors and the trunk automatically lock
the trunk, lock it separately with the mechanical trunk. when the ignition is switched on and the
key. Leave only the SmartKey less its mechani- wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
cal key with the vehicle. The trunk remains locked even when the
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
The lock is located next to the handle You can open a locked door from the
above the rear license plate recess. i You can only cancel the separate trunk lock- inside. Open door only when conditions
ing mode by means of the mechanical key.
are safe to do so.
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock. i The doors unlock automatically after an ac-
cident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset
왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock- threshold.
wise to neutral position 1 and remove To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
the mechanical key in that position to deactivate the automatic central locking when
unlock the trunk. the vehicle
앫 is pushed or towed
You can now open the trunk
(컄 page 96). 앫 is on a test stand
1 Neutral position You can deactivate the automatic locking
2 Locked mode using the control system, see “Set-
왘 Close the trunk (컄 page 97). ting automatic locking” (컄 page 143).
왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 361).
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.

99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking from the inside The switches are located in the center If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen-
console. tral locking switch 1
You can lock or unlock the doors and the 앫 while in the selective remote control mode,
trunk from inside using the central locking only the door opened from the inside is un-
or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for locked.
example, if you want to lock the vehicle 앫 while in the global remote control mode, the
before starting to drive. complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
opened from the inside.
You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap
with the central locking or unlocking Locking
switch.
왘 Press central locking switch 1.

Warning! G 1 Central locking switch


If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
2 Central unlocking switch
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it i You can open a locked door from the inside. Unlocking
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave Open door only when conditions are safe to do 왘 Press central unlocking switch 2.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with so.
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s If the vehicle was previously centrally locked us-
The vehicle unlocks.
unsupervised access to a vehicle could ing the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the cen-
result in an accident and/or serious tral unlocking switch 2.
personal injury.

100
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see You cannot remove the active head re- Rear seat head restraints
“Adjusting” (컄 page 34). straints on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat.
Front seat active head restraints For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G
we recommend that you contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, always drive with the
Warning! G rear head restraints in the upright position
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that when the rear seats are occupied.
it is as close to the head as possible.
For your protection, drive only with properly Keep the area around head restraints clear
positioned head restraints. For information on head restraint of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 34). folding operation of the head restraints.
close to the head as possible and the center For information on active head restraints,
of the head restraint supports the back of see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 73).
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
tential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.

101
Controls in detail
Seats

Head restraint height (rear outer seats) Folding head restraints back with
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
release button
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an The rear seat head restraints can be folded
accident. backward for increased visibility.

i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that


it is as close to the head as possible.

Raising
왘 Manually adjust the height of the head
1 Release button restraint by pulling it upward.
If the head restraint is fully retracted,
Warning! G push release button 1 and pull the
head restraint up. 1 Release button
For your protection, drive only with properly
왘 Push release button 1.
positioned head restraints. Lowering
The head restraint will fold backward.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re- 왘 To lower the head restraint, push
straint supports the back of the head at eye release button 1 and push down on i You can also fold the rear outer seat head
level. This will reduce the potential for injury the head restraint. restraints back using the switch in the center
to the head and neck in the event of an ac- console.
cident or similar situation.

102
Controls in detail
Seats

Folding head restraints back with Placing head restraints upright Head restraint tilt (rear outer seats)
switch in the center console Two different head restraint angle
positions are available:
왘 Press the release button (컄 page 102)
and tilt the head restraint to the
desired position.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.

왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it


1 Switch for rear seat head restraints locks into position.
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 46).
왘 Press switch 1.
Warning! G
The rear seat head restraints will fold Make sure the head restraints engage when
backward. placing them upright. Otherwise their
protective function cannot be assured.

103
Controls in detail
Seats

Removing and installing rear seat head Installing rear seat head restraints
restraints (rear outer seats)
왘 Insert head restraint and push it down
i The rear center seat head restraint cannot until it engages.
be removed.
왘 Push release button 1 and adjust
head restraint to desired position.
Warning! G i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re- 1 Release button
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury Removing rear seat head restraints
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
왘 Fold back head restraint (컄 page 102).
cident or similar situation.
왘 Pull head restraint to its highest
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
position.
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- 왘 Push release button 1 and pull out
dent. head restraint.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.

104
Controls in detail
Seats

Lumbar support Multicontour seats* (Canada only) 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).

The curvature of the front seats can be ad- This driver’s multicontour seat has a mov- Seat cushion depth
justed to help enhance lower back support able seat cushion and inflatable air cush-
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
and seating comfort. ions built into the backrest to provide
length of your upper leg using
additional lumbar and side support.
switch 1.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be Backrest contour
continuously varied with switches on the
왘 Adjust the contour of the backrest to
side of the seat after switching on ignition.
the desired position using switches 2
and 3.

Backrest side bolsters


왘 Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
1 Adjustment lever that they provide good lateral support
왘 Move adjustment lever 1 in direction using switch 4.
of arrows until you have reached a
i If, after a period of time, the seat no longer
comfortable seating position. provides the desired contour, then repeat the ad-
justment procedure.
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest side bolster adjustment

105
Controls in detail
Seats

Seat heating* Level Switching on seat heating

3 Three indicator lamps on 왘 Press switch 1 once.


Both switches for the front seats are locat-
ed in the center console. The red indicator (highest level). Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
lamps in the switch come on to show heat- After approximately 5 minutes, switch come on.
ing level you have selected. seat heating is automatically 왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
switched to level 2. desired seat heating level is reached.
2 Two indicator lamps on.
Switching off seat heating
After approximately 10 minutes,
seat heating is automatically 왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
switched to level 1. indicator lamps 2 go out.
1 One indicator lamp on (lowest i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on
level). the seat heating switch are flashing, there is in-
sufficient voltage due to too many electrical con-
After approximately 20 minutes, sumers are turned on. The seat heating switches
seat heating is automatically off automatically.
1 Seat heating switch
switched off.
2 Indicator lamps The seat heating will switch back on again auto-
off No indicator lamp on. matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). able.

106
Controls in detail
Memory function*
왔 Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up The following settings are stored for the
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different settings. front passenger seat when using the but-
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- The following settings are stored for the tons (if so equipped depending on vehicle
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate driver’s seat when using the buttons on the equipment configuration) on the passen-
control, reach and comfort. The head re- driver’s door: ger door:
straint should also be adjusted for proper
앫 Front passenger seat, backrest and
height. See also the section on air bags 앫 Driver’s seat, backrest and head
head restraint position
(컄 page 59) for proper seat positioning. restraint position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to 앫 Steering wheel position
ensure adequate control, reach, operation 앫 Exterior rear view mirrors
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision. Warning! G
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil- Do not activate the memory function while
dren should be seated in a properly se- driving. Activating the memory function
cured restraint system that complies with while driving could cause the driver to lose
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety control of the vehicle.
Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2.

107
Controls in detail
Memory function*

The memory button and memory position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
switch are located on the door.
왘 Adjust the seat, steering wheel and ! Do not operate the power seats using the
exterior rear view mirrors to the memory button if the seat backrest is in an ex-
desired position (컄 page 34). cessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
damage to front or rear seats.
왘 Turn memory position switch 2 to the
desired memory position. 왘 Turn memory position switch 2 to the
desired memory position.
왘 Press memory button 1.
왘 Press and hold memory position
왘 Release memory button 1 and press switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel
memory position switch 2 within and exterior rear view mirrors have
3 seconds. completely moved to the stored
1 Memory button positions.
All settings are stored to the selected
2 Memory position switch
position.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). i Releasing the memory position switch stops
movement to the stored positions immediately.
or
왘 Open the respective door.

108
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch B Low beam headlamps or high beam
headlamps and use the turn signals, see headlamps when the combination
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 50) switch is pushed forward. The tail
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 50). lamps, license plate lamps, side
marker lamps, parking lamps and
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive instrument panel lamps also come
on the other side of the road than the country
where the vehicle is registered, you must have on.
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at stop)
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
Exterior lamp switch
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
M Off
Daytime running lamp mode † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
(컄 page 111)
i If you hear a warning signal you have
U Automatic headlamp mode forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
Daytime running lamp mode opening the driver’s door.
(컄 page 111) In addition the message Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker Switch off the headlamps.
lamps, instrument panel lamps)

109
Controls in detail
Lighting

Manual headlamp mode


The low beam headlamps and the parking
Warning! G The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
lamps can be switched on and off with the If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
exterior lamp switch. times.
앫 the headlamps may switch off
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to unexpectedly when the system senses
position B. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
bright ambient light, for example light
from oncoming traffic. position U.
Automatic headlamp mode 앫 the headlamps will not be automatically With the SmartKey in starter switch
The following lamps switch on and off switched on under foggy conditions. position 1, only the parking lamps and
automatically depending on the brightness To minimize risk to you and to others, the side marker lamps will switch on
of the ambient light: activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp and off automatically.
switch to B when driving or when traffic When the engine is running, the low
앫 Low beam headlamps
and/or ambient lighting conditions require beam headlamps, the tail and parking
앫 Tail and parking lamps you to do so. lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
앫 License plate lamps In low ambient lighting conditions, only side marker lamps will switch on and
switch from position U to B with the off automatically.
앫 Side marker lamps
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
i USA only:
Switching from U to B will briefly With the automatic headlamp mode activated
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while you can switch on the high beam headlamps in
driving in low ambient lighting conditions low ambient lighting conditions.
may result in an accident.

110
Controls in detail
Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in USA only:
position M or U, you cannot switch on the
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to By default, the daytime running lamp mode
high beam headlamps.
position M or U. is deactivated. Activate the daytime
The high beam flasher is available at all times. running lamp mode using the control
When the engine is running, the low
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
beam headlamps are switched on. switch to position B to permit activation of mode (USA only)” (컄 page 139).
In low ambient light conditions, the the high beam headlamps.
following lamps will switch on Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
i With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
additionally: When the engine is running, and you shift position M, you cannot switch on the high
앫 Tail and parking lamps from a driving position to position N or P, beam headlamps.
the low beam headlamps will switch off The high beam flasher is available at all times.
앫 License plate lamps with a three-minute delay.
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
앫 Side marker lamps When the engine is running, and you switch to position B or U to permit
i With the daytime running lamp mode activation of the high beam headlamps.
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
activated and the engine running, you cannot When the engine is running, and you turn
position C, the parking lamps and
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
the side marker lamps switch on the exterior lamp switch to position C
additionally. or B, the manual headlamp mode has
Canada only: priority over the daytime running lamp
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
The daytime running lamp mode is mode.
position B, the manual headlamp
mandatory and therefore in a constant The corresponding exterior lamps switch
mode has priority over the daytime
mode. on (컄 page 109).
running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 109).

111
Controls in detail
Lighting

Locator lighting and night security i Fog lamps will operate with the parking 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
illumination lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
The front fog lamps switch off.
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
The locator lighting and the night security low beam headlamps. Consult your State or The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
illumination are described in the “Control Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding exterior lamp switch goes out.
system” section, see “Setting locator light- permissible lamp operation.
ing” (컄 page 140) and “Setting night secu-
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
rity illumination” (컄 page 141).
exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch 왘 Switch on the low beam
on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
Fog lamps headlamps B (컄 page 109).
position B first.
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
Warning! G Front fog lamps second stop.
왘 Switch on the low beam The front fog lamps and the rear fog
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, lamp switch on.
headlamps B (컄 page 109).
only switch from position U to B with The yellow indicator lamp † in the
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. 왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
exterior lamp switch comes on
Switching from U to B will briefly stop.
(컄 page 109).
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while The front fog lamps switch on.
driving in low ambient lighting conditions 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
may result in an accident. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the stop.
exterior lamp switch comes on
The rear fog lamp switches off.
(컄 page 109).
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.

112
Controls in detail
Lighting

Combination switch 왘 Pull the combination switch in direction The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
of arrow 2 to its original position to operate with the engine running and with
switch off the high beam.
앫 the exterior lamp switch in
The high beam headlamp indicator position B (컄 page 109)
lamp A in the instrument cluster
or
goes out.
앫 the exterior lamp switch in
High beam flasher position U (컄 page 109)
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in or
direction of arrow 2. 앫 the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄 page 111)
Combination switch Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
1 High beam (C 230 (Canada only), C 280, C 350 and i With the automatic headlamp mode activat-
2 High beam flasher models with 4MATIC: with Bi-Xenon* ed: The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
headlamps)
High beam i If you are driving faster than 25 mph
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
improve illumination of the area in the on, the corner-illuminating front fog lamps
position B (컄 page 109). function is not available.
direction into which you are turning.
왘 Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 24).

113
Controls in detail
Lighting

Driving forward i If you have switched on the turn signal for Switching off corner-illuminating front
one side but turn the steering wheel in the fog lamps
Switching on corner-illuminating front opposite direction, the corner-illuminating front
fog lamp comes on for the side indicated by the The combination switch for the turn signal
fog lamps resets automatically after major steering
turn signal.
왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal wheel movements. This will switch off the
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
(컄 page 50), depending on whether for a maximum of three minutes. Afterward, it corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
you are turning left or right. goes out even if the turn signal is still switched were activated by switching on the left or
on. right turn signal.
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the area in the i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem- If the turn signal should stay on after
direction into which you are turning. porarily come on, on both sides of the vehicle if making the turn, the turn signal and the
you turn the steering wheel in one direction and corner-illuminating front fog lamp can be
or
then again in the other direction shortly thereaf- switched off by returning the combination
왘 Turning steering wheel in desired ter. switch to its original position.
direction.
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will i There may be a brief delay before the
The front fog lamp on the side of your come on automatically depending on the corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
steering direction comes on. steering angle, even if you did not switch on
either turn signal.
If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out
automatically depending on the steering angle.

114
Controls in detail
Lighting

Driving in reverse Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher


왘 Press hazard warning flasher
Switching on corner-illuminating front The hazard warning flasher can be
switch 1.
fog lamps switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter All turn signal lamps are flashing.
왘 Place the gear selector lever (manual
switch.
transmission: gearshift lever) in i With the hazard warning flasher activated
position R. The hazard warning flasher switches on and the combination switch set for either left or
automatically when an air bag deploys. right turn, only the respective left or right turn
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp signals will operate when the ignition is switched
opposite to your steering direction The hazard warning flasher switch is on (컄 page 32).
comes on. located on the center console.
Switching off hazard warning flasher
Switching off corner-illuminating front
왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
fog lamps
again.
왘 Place the gear selector lever (manual
transmission: gearshift lever) out of i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard warning
position R. flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
The respective front fog lamp goes out.

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

115
Controls in detail
Lighting

Interior lighting ! An interior lamp switched on manually does Activating automatic control
not go out automatically.
왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center
The controls are located in the overhead Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON posi- position.
control panel. tion for extended periods of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged battery. The interior lighting switch on in
darkness, when you
Deactivating automatic control 앫 unlock the vehicle
i The interior lighting is factory-set to auto- 앫 remove the SmartKey from the
matic mode. starter switch
왘 Press the = symbol on rocker 앫 open a door
switch 3.
앫 open the trunk
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you The interior lighting switches off after ap-
1 Rear interior lighting on/off proximately 10 seconds, see “Setting inte-
2 Right front reading lamp on/off 앫 unlock the vehicle rior lighting delayed shut-off”
3 Rocker switch for automatic control 앫 remove the SmartKey from the (컄 page 142).
system starter switch
4 Left front reading lamp on/off
i If a door remains open, the interior lighting
앫 open a door switches off automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
앫 open the trunk

116
Controls in detail
Lighting

Manual control Switching front reading lamps on and off Door entry lamps
왘 Press the left or right button X to
Switching front interior lighting on and For better orientation in the dark, the cor-
switch on the desired front reading
off responding door entry lamps will switch on
lamp.
in darkness when you open a door and the
왘 Press the W symbol on rocker
왘 Press the left or right button X automatic control is activated.
switch 3.
again to switch off the respective front
The door entry lamps will switch off when
The front interior lighting comes on. reading lamp.
the corresponding door is closed.
왘 Press rocker switch 3 to center
position to activate the automatic i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior
control. headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit
for approximately 5 minutes.
Switching rear interior lighting on and
off Trunk lamp
왘 Press button V.
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
The lighting in the rear passenger opened.
compartment comes on.
If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
왘 Press button V again. lamp switches off automatically after
The lighting in the rear passenger approximately 10 minutes.
compartment goes out.

117
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

For a full view illustration of the instrument Adjusting instrument cluster


cluster, see “At a glance” (컄 page 24). Warning! G illumination

No messages will be displayed if either the Use reset button 1 to adjust the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- illumination brightness for the instrument
play is inoperative. cluster.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
i The instrument cluster illumination is
mation about your driving conditions, such dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
as speed or outside temperature, bient light conditions.
warning/indicator lamps, The instrument cluster illumination will also be
malfunction/warning messages or the adjusted automatically when you switch on the
failure of any systems. Driving vehicle’s exterior lamps.
1 Reset button characteristics may be impaired.
The instrument cluster is activated when If you must continue to drive, please do so To brighten illumination
you with added caution. Visit an authorized 왘 Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
앫 open a door The instrument cluster illumination will
앫 switch on ignition (컄 page 32) brighten.

앫 press reset button 1 To dim illumination


앫 switch on the exterior lighting 왘 Turn reset button 1 counterclock-
You can change the instrument cluster wise.
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu The instrument cluster illumination will
of the control system (컄 page 134). dim.

118
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Coolant temperature gauge ! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a Resetting trip odometer
warning in the multifunction display
The coolant temperature gauge is on the (컄 page 346). 왘 Make sure you are viewing the trip
left side in the instrument cluster The engine should not be operated with the cool- odometer and main odometer in the
(컄 page 24). ant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so multifunction display (컄 page 121).
may cause serious engine damage which is not
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-
Warning! G ty. or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄 page 122) until the trip
앫 Driving when your engine is badly i During severe operating conditions, e.g. odometer appears in the multifunction
overheated can cause some fluids which stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may display.
may have leaked into the engine rise close to 248°F (120°C).
compartment to catch fire. You could be 왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
seriously burned. instrument cluster (컄 page 118) until
the trip odometer is reset.
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.

119
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the


front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer sensor can be affected by road or engine
(컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. There-
speed. fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-
The outside temperature indicator is not de- ature can only be verified by comparison to
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
it may result in serious engine damage that is not a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. not by comparison to external displays
ty. Indicated temperatures just above the freez- (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
is interrupted if the engine is operated face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
within the red marking. especially in wooded areas or on bridges. garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
The outside temperature is indicated in the A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
multifunction display (컄 page 121). atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.

120
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
앫 call up information about your vehicle focus when driving.
앫 change vehicle settings For your safety and the safety of others,
For example, you can use the control selecting features through the multifunction
system to find out when your vehicle is steering wheel should only be done by the
next due for service, to set the language driver when traffic and road conditions
for messages in the instrument cluster permit it to be done safely.
display, and much more. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
i The displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of covering a distance of 44 feet 3 Current program mode
the language selected. (approximately 14 m) every second. (automatic transmission*)
4 Current gear selector lever
The control system relays information to position/gear range
the multifunction display. (automatic transmission*)
5 Digital clock
6 Status indicator (outside tempera-
ture/digital speedometer)

121
Controls in detail
Control system

Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display 4 Menu systems:


Operating the control system Press button
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are 2 Selecting the submenu or setting è for next menu
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- the volume: ÿ for previous menu
tion steering wheel. Press button 5 Moving within a menu:
æ up/to increase Press button
ç down/to decrease j for next display
3 Telephone*: k for previous display
Press button
s to take a call
to dial
to redial
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call

122
Controls in detail
Control system

Depending on the selected menu It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions
(컄 page 125), pressing the buttons on the functions within each menu, as being you will find a number of submenus for
multifunction steering wheel will alter what arranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For
is shown in the multifunction display. instructions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ
“Submenus in the Settings menu”
The information available in the multifunc- repeatedly, you will pass through each
(컄 page 132).
tion display is arranged in menus, each menu one after the other.
containing a number of functions or sub- The number of menus available in the sys-
앫 If you press button k or j
menus. tem depends on which optional equipment
repeatedly, you will pass through each
is installed in your vehicle.
The individual functions are then found function display, one after the other, in
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op- the current menu. i The headings used in the menus table are
erations under AUDIO, for example). These designed to facilitate navigation within the sys-
functions serve to call up relevant informa- tem and are not necessarily identical to those
tion or to customize the settings for your shown in the control system displays.
vehicle. The first function displayed in each menu will au-
tomatically show you which part of the system
i C 230 Sport and C 350 Sport: you are in.
Steering wheel in these vehicles will vary from
steering wheel shown. However, multifunction
steering wheel symbols and feature description
apply to Sport models as well.

123
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.

124
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7


Standard AUDIO NAV* Vehicle status Settings Trip computer TEL*
display message memory
(컄 page 126) (컄 page 127) (컄 page 129) (컄 page 130) (컄 page 131) (컄 page 144) (컄 page 146)
Run Flat Selecting radio Show route guid- Call up vehicle mal- Reset to Fuel consumption Load phone
Indicator* station ance instructions, function, warning and factory statistics from book
(Canada only) current direction system status messag- settings start
traveled es stored in memory1
Commands/submenus

Digital speed- Selecting satel- Instrument Fuel consumption Search for


ometer or out- lite radio sta- cluster sub- statistics since name in
side temperature tion* (USA only) menu the last reset phone book
Call up main- Operating Time/Date Distance to
tenance service CD player* submenu empty
display
Lighting
submenu
Vehicle
submenu
Convenience
submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

125
Controls in detail
Control system

Standard display menu If another display is shown instead of the Call up digital speedometer or outside
standard display: temperature
In the standard display, the main odometer
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
and the trip odometer are shown in the
until you see the standard display. until the digital speedometer or the
multifunction display.
outside temperature appears in the
왘 Press button k or j to select
multifunction display.
the functions in the standard display
menu.
The following functions are available:
Function Page
Run Flat Indicator* (Canada 291
only)
Call up digital speedometer or 126
outside temperature
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer Call up maintenance service 310
display Example illustration
1 Digital speedometer
i You can select whether the digital speedom-
eter or the outside temperature is to be dis-
played, see “Select display (digital speedometer
or outside temperature) for status indicator”
(컄 page 135).

126
Controls in detail
Control system

AUDIO menu Selecting radio station The station search depends on the se-
lected setting in the Vehicle submenu
왘 Turn on the radio (컄 page 190) and se-
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate of the control system (컄 page 142).
lect radio. Vehicles with COMAND*:
the audio equipment which you currently Pressing button k or j will ei-
Refer to separate operating instruc-
have turned on. ther start a frequency scan or select
tions.
If no audio equipment is currently turned the next stored radio station.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the i You can only store new stations using the
until the currently tuned station
multifunction display. corresponding feature on the radio
appears in the multifunction display.
(컄 page 196).
The following functions are available:
Vehicles with COMAND*:
Function Page Refer to separate operating instructions.
Selecting radio station 127 You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
Selecting satellite radio station* 127
(USA only)
Selecting satellite radio station*
Operating CD player* 128 (USA only)
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
application.
1 Waveband setting 왘 Select satellite radio with the
2 Station frequency corresponding soft key (SAT) in the
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly radio menu. 컄컄
until the desired station or the desired
stored station is found.

127
Controls in detail
Control system

컄컄 Operating the CD player*


i The COMAND* system and the
CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as CDs
with MP3 files.

Selecting CD track
왘 Turn on the radio and select CD or
CD changer* (컄 page 205).
Vehicles with COMAND*:
1 SAT mode and preset number Refer to separate operating 1 Current CD (with additional number
2 Channel name or number instructions. from 1 to 6 when running from
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly CD changer*)
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently 2 Current track
until the desired channel is found.
being played appear in the 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
i For more information on satellite radio oper- multifunction display. until the desired track is selected.
ation, see “Introduction to satellite radio*
(USA only)” (컄 page 197). i To select a CD from the CD changer* maga-
Vehicles with COMAND*: zine, press a number on the audio system or the
Refer to separate operating instructions. COMAND* system key pad located in the center
console.
For more information on CD operation, see
“CD mode” (컄 page 201) and for the
CD changer*, see (컄 page 204).

128
Controls in detail
Control system

Selecting CD MP3-track (vehicles with NAV* menu


COMAND* and/or CD changer*)
The NAV menu contains the functions
왘 Turn on the radio and select the
needed to operate your navigation system.
CD changer* (컄 page 205) or turn on
COMAND* and select CD or 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
CD changer*. Vehicles with until the message NAV appears in the
COMAND*: Refer to separate multifunction display.
operating instructions. 앫 If COMAND* is switched off, the mes-
i A CD with MP3 files insert in the sage NAV OFF appears in the multifunc-
CD changer* is handled by the 1 MP3 mode (vehicles with COMAND*) tion display.
audio/COMAND* system like an audio CD. In-
2 Current track 앫 With COMAND* switched on but route
formation contained on the CD with MP3 files
will not shown in the multifunction display or in 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly guidance not activated, the direction of
the audio/COMAND* display. until the desired track is selected. travel and, if available, the name of the
street currently traveled on appear in
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly i Level of information displayed will vary de- the multifunction display.
until the settings for the CD currently pending on the information contained on the CD
being played appear in the with MP3 files insert in the single CD player of 앫 With COMAND* switched on and route
multifunction display. the COMAND* system. guidance activated, the direction of
To select a CD from the CD changer* magazine,
travel and maneuver instructions ap-
press a number on the audio system or the pear in the multifunction display.
COMAND* system key pad located in the center Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
console.
instructions on how to activate the route
For more information on MP3, see “MP3 guidance system*.
notes” (컄 page 202), and for operating,
see “MP3 playback” (컄 page 204).

129
Controls in detail
Control system

Vehicle status message memory menu Vehicle status messages have been
safety checks performed on the vehicle and
recorded
by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Use the vehicle status message memory
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the mal- If conditions have occurred causing status
menu to scan malfunction and warning
function and warning messages messages to be recorded, the number of
messages that may be stored in the
(컄 page 333). messages appears in the multifunction
system. Such messages appear in the mul-
display:
tifunction display and are based on condi-
tions or system status the vehicle’s system 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
has recorded. until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the multifunction
The vehicle status message memory menu display.
only appears if there are any messages
stored. If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, then there are
no messages stored.
Warning! G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are inten- 1 Number of messages
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction 왘 Press button k or j.
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain The stored messages will now be
systems and do not replace the owner’s displayed in the order in which they
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain have occurred. For malfunction and
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all warning messages, see “Vehicle status
required maintenance and messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 333).

130
Controls in detail
Control system

Should the vehicle’s system record any Settings menu Resetting all settings
conditions while driving, the number of
You can reset all the functions of all
messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two
submenus to the factory settings.
tion display when the SmartKey in the functions:
starter switch is turned to position 0 or 왘 Press the reset button in the
앫 The function Reset to factory
removed from the starter switch. instrument cluster (컄 page 118) for
settings, with which you can reset all
approximately 3 seconds.
i The vehicle status message memory will be the settings to the original factory
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start- settings. The request to press the reset button
er switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only once more to confirm appears in the
앫 A collection of submenus with which
see high-priority messages in the multifunction multifunction display.
display (컄 page 333). you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.

왘 Press the reset button once more.


The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.

131
Controls in detail
Control system

i The settings you have changed will not be re- Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
set unless you confirm the action by pressing the Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
왘 Press button j.
reset button a second time. After approximately with button æ.
5 seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the The collection of the submenus
multifunction display. With the selection marker on the desired
appears in the multifunction display.
submenu, use the button j to access
For safety reasons, the following function are not
reset while driving: the individual functions within that sub-
menu. Once within the submenu, you can
앫 the Headlamp mode function in the Light-
ing submenu
use the button j to move to the next
function or the button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
왘 Press button ç. Detailed instructions on making individual
The selection marker moves to the next settings can be found on the following
submenu. pages.

132
Controls in detail
Control system

Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience


(컄 page 134) (컄 page 136) (컄 page 139) (컄 page 142) (컄 page 143)
Select speedometer Time synchronization with head Setting daytime running Set automatic Activate easy-entry/exit
display mode unit* lamp mode (USA only) locking feature*
Select language Set the time (hours) Setting locator lighting
Select display (speed Set the time (minutes) Setting night security
display or outside illumination
temperature) for status
indicator
Select automatic time change Setting interior lighting
(Daylight Saving Time (DST) delayed shut-off
summer/Standard time winter)
Set the date (month)
Set the date (day)
Set the date (year)

133
Controls in detail
Control system

Instrument cluster submenu Select speedometer display mode Select language


Access the Inst.cluster submenu via the 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
Settings menu. Use the Inst.cluster button æ or ç to the button æ or ç to the
submenu to change the instrument cluster Inst.cluster submenu. Inst.cluster submenu.
display settings.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
The following functions are available: until the message Disp.Unit until the message Language appears in
Speed-/odom. appears in the multifunc- the multifunction display.
Function Page
tion display. The selection marker is on the current
Select speedometer display 134
The selection marker is on the current setting.
mode
setting.
Select language 134
Select display (speed display or 135
outside temperature) for status
indicator

왘 Press button æ or ç to set


speedometer unit to km or miles.

134
Controls in detail
Control system

왘 Press button æ or ç to select Select display (digital speedometer or 왘 Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the outside temperature) for status the desired setting.
multifunction display messages. indicator
The selected display is then shown
Available languages: 왘 Move the selection marker with continuously in the lower display.
button æ or ç to the
앫 German The other display now appears in the
Inst.cluster submenu.
menu of the standard display:
앫 English
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 Digital speedometer
앫 French until the message Status line
display appears in the multifunction or
앫 Italian
display. 앫 Outside temperature
앫 Spanish
The selection marker is on the current
앫 Dutch setting.
앫 Danish
앫 Swedish
앫 Portuguese
앫 Turkish
앫 Russian (Canada only)

135
Controls in detail
Control system

Time/Date submenu Time synchronization with head unit* Set the time (hours)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function can only be seen on vehicles This function can be seen in vehicles with
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date with COMAND* and navigation module*. audio system, or in vehicles with
submenu to change the instrument cluster COMAND* if the time synchronization with
왘 Move the selection marker with
display settings. head unit* feature was set to Off.
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
The following functions are available: submenu. i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the time, refer to the
Function Page 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
separate COMAND operating instructions.
until the message Time synchro.
Time synchronization with 136 왘 Move the selection marker with
w/Head Unit appears in the multifunc-
head unit* button æ or ç to the Time/Date
tion display.
Set the time (hours) 136 submenu.
The selection marker is on the current
Set the time (minutes) 137 setting. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Select automatic time change 137 until the message Time Hours appears
(Daylight Saving Time (DST) in the multifunction display.
summer/Standard time winter) The selection marker is on the hour
Set the date (month) 138 setting.
Set the date (day) 138
Set the date (year) 138

왘 Press button æ or ç to select


the desired setting.

136
Controls in detail
Control system

왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Move the selection marker with


until the message Time Minutes button æ or ç to the Time/Date
appears in the multifunction display. submenu.
The selection marker is on the minute 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
setting. until the message Daylight sav.
Summer / Winter time appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.

Set the time (minutes)


This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
COMAND* if the time synchronization with minutes.
head unit* feature was set to Off.
Select automatic time change (Daylight
i Vehicles with COMAND*: Saving Time (DST) summer/Standard
For information on setting the time, refer to the 왘 Press button æ or ç to select if
separate COMAND operating instructions. time winter)
the changeover between summer and
왘 Move the selection marker with This function can be seen in vehicles with winter time should be automatic or
button æ or ç to the Time/Date audio system, or in vehicles with manual.
submenu. COMAND* if the time synchronization with
head unit* feature was set to Off.

137
Controls in detail
Control system

Set the date (month) 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly


until the message Date Set day
This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with appears in the multifunction display.
COMAND* if the time synchronization with The selection marker is on the day
head unit* feature was set to Off. setting.
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date, refer to the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
submenu. month.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Set the date (day)
until the message Date Set month ap-
pears in the multifunction display. This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
The selection marker is on the month
COMAND* if the time synchronization with day.
setting.
head unit* feature was set to Off.
Set the date (year)
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date, refer to the This function can be seen in vehicles with
separate COMAND operating instructions. audio system, or in vehicles with
왘 Move the selection marker with COMAND* if the time synchronization with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date head unit* feature was set to Off.
submenu.

138
Controls in detail
Control system

i Vehicles with COMAND*: Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode
For information on setting the date, refer to the (USA only)
Access the Lighting submenu via the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
Settings menu. Use the Lighting i This function is not available in countries
왘 Move the selection marker with submenu to change the lamp and lighting where the daytime running lamp mode is
button æ or ç to the Time/Date settings on your vehicle. mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
submenu.
The following functions are available: 왘 Move the selection marker with
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly button æ or ç to the Lighting
until the message Date Set year ap- Function Page submenu.
pears in the multifunction display. Setting daytime running lamp 139 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
The selection marker is on the year mode (USA only) until the message Headlamp mode ap-
setting. Setting locator lighting 140 pears in the multifunction display.
Setting night security 141 The selection marker is on the current
illumination setting.
Setting interior lighting delayed 142
shut-off

왘 Press button æ or ç to set the


year.
컄컄

139
Controls in detail
Control system

컄컄 왘 Press button æ or ç to select i For safety reasons, resetting the Lighting If you do not open a door after unlocking
manual operation (Manual) or daytime submenu to factory settings (컄 page 131) while the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
running lamp mode (Constant). driving will not deactivate the daytime running will switch off automatically after
lamp mode. approximately 40 seconds.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
The following message appears in the
and the exterior lamp switch in 왘 Move the selection marker with
multifunction display:
position M or U, the low beam Lighting - Cannot be completely reset button æ or ç to the Lighting
headlamps are switched on when the to factory settings while driving. submenu.
engine is running.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
In low ambient light conditions the Setting locator lighting until the message Surround lighting
following lamps will switch on additionally: With the locator lighting feature activated appears in the multifunction display.
앫 Parking lamps and the exterior lamp switch in The selection marker is on the current
position U, the following lamps will setting.
앫 Tail lamps switch on during darkness when the vehi-
앫 License plate lamps cle is unlocked with the SmartKey:
앫 Side marker lamps 앫 Parking lamps
For more information on the daytime 앫 Tail lamps
running lamp mode, see “Lighting” 앫 License plate lamps
(컄 page 109).
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function On or Off.

140
Controls in detail
Control system

왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to If after turning off the engine you do not 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
position U when exiting the vehicle. open a door or do not close an opened the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
door, the lamps will automatically switch On or Off.
The locator lighting feature is
off after 60 seconds.
activated. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
왘 Move the selection marker with position U before turning off the
Setting night security illumination button æ or ç to the Lighting engine.
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) submenu.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly feature is activated.
like the exterior lamps to remain on for until the message Headl. delayed You can temporarily deactivate the head-
15 seconds during darkness after exiting shut-off appears in the multifunction
lamp delayed shut-off feature:
the vehicle and closing all doors. display.
왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
With the headlamps delayed shut-off The selection marker is on the current
SmartKey in the starter switch to
feature activated and the exterior lamp setting.
position 0.
switch in position U before the engine
is turned off, the following lamps will 왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back to
switch on when the engine is turned off: position 0.
앫 Parking lamps The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
앫 Tail lamps as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
앫 License plate lamps the starter switch.
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 Front fog lamps

141
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
the interior lighting delayed shut-off until the message Audio search
Use this function to set whether you would
feature Off or On. appears in the multifunction display.
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have The selection marker is on the current
removed the SmartKey from the starter Vehicle submenu setting.
switch. Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
왘 Move the selection marker with
to make general vehicle settings.
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu. The following function is available:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Function Page
until the message Interior light.
Selecting audio search function 142
delay.sw.off appears in the multifunc-
tion display. Setting automatic locking 143
The selection marker is on the current
Selecting audio search function 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
setting.
Use of the Audio search function to select audio search function to Frequency
a radio station (컄 page 127) will enable or Memory.
you to start a frequency scan (Frequency) To select a radio station, see “Selecting ra-
or select a radio station stored in memory dio station” (컄 page 127).
(Memory).
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.

142
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting automatic locking Convenience submenu


Use this function to activate or deactivate Access the Convenience submenu via the
the automatic central locking. With the Settings menu. Use the Convenience
automatic central locking system submenu to change the settings for a
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at number of convenience features.
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
The following functions are available:
(15 km/h).
Function Page
왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle Activate 144
submenu. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch easy-entry/exit feature*
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly the automatic central locking On or Off.
until the message Automatic door
lock appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.

143
Controls in detail
Control system

Activate easy-entry/exit feature* 왘 Move the selection marker with Trip computer menu
button æ or ç to the
Use this function to activate and
Convenience submenu. Use the trip computer menu to call up
deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
statistical data on your vehicle.
(컄 page 40). 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Easy-entry feature The following information is available:
Warning! G appears in the multifunction display.
Function Page
The selection marker is on the current Fuel consumption statistics from 144
You must make sure no one can become setting. start
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is Fuel consumption statistics 145
activated. since last reset
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of Distance to empty 146
the following:
앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
Fuel consumption statistics from start
(컄 page 40). 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
앫 Press memory position switch* until the first function of the trip
(컄 page 108). computer menu appears in the
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch multifunction display.
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the easy-entry feature On or Off. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Children could open the driver’s door and until the message From start appears
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit in the multifunction display.
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

144
Controls in detail
Control system

Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics


왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip until the first function of the trip
computer menu appears in the computer menu appears in the
multifunction display. multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Since reset appears until the reading that you want to reset
in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
1 Distance driven since start instrument cluster (컄 page 118) until
2 Time elapsed since start the value is reset to 0.
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
i All statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
1 Distance driven since last reset
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset

145
Controls in detail
Control system

Distance to empty TEL menu*


Never operate radio transmitters equipped
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
until the first function of the trip
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
computer menu appears in the A driver’s attention to the road must always
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
multifunction display. be his/her primary focus when driving. For
possibly resulting in an accident and
your safety and the safety of others, we
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly personal injury.
recommend that you pull over to a safe
until the message Range: appears in
location and stop before placing or taking a
the multifunction display. You can use the functions in the TEL menu
telephone call. If you choose to use the
The calculated remaining driving range telephone while driving, please use the to operate your telephone, provided it is
based on the current fuel tank level hands-free device and only use the connected to a hands-free system and
appears in the multifunction display. telephone when weather, road and traffic switched on.
conditions permit. 왘 Switch on the telephone and Audio or
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from COMAND*.
using a cellular telephone while driving a 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
vehicle. steering wheel repeatedly until the
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph message TEL appears in the
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is multifunction display.
covering a distance of 44 feet Which messages will appear in the
(approximately 14 m) every second. multifunction display depends on whether
your telephone is switched on or off:

146
Controls in detail
Control system

앫 If the telephone is off, the message Answering a call Dialing a number from the phone book
Phone off appears in the multifunction
When your telephone is ready to receive If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
display. calls, you can answer a call at any time. In you may select and dial a number from the
앫 If the telephone is on: the multifunction display you will see the phone book at any time.
message, or if available, the caller ID
The telephone will then search for a 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
(name and number):
network. During this time the multi- until the message TEL appears in the
function display is empty. multifunction display.
As soon as the telephone has found a 왘 Press button j or k.
network, the message READY appears in
The control system reads the phone
the multifunction display. book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. The
message Please wait appears in the
multifunction display.
When the message Please wait
왘 Press button s. disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
You have answered the call. The
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
duration of the call appears in the
multifunction display. until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
This standby message indicates that your
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming The stored names are displayed in
telephone is ready for use and you can
call ascending or descending alphabetical
operate it using the control system.
order. 컄컄
왘 Press button t.

147
Controls in detail
Control system

컄컄 앫 If the connection is successful and Redialing


this feature is supported by your The control system stores the most
network provider, the name of the recently dialed phone numbers. This
party you are calling (if stored in eliminates the need to search through your
your phone book) and the duration entire phone book.
of the call will appear in the multi-
function display. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message TEL appears in the
multifunction display.
왘 Press button s.
1 Name from the phone book
The first number in the redial memory
i If you press and hold button j or k appears in the multifunction display.
for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rap-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
idly through the list of names until you release
the button again. until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing
button t. 왘 Press button s.
앫 If no connection is made, the
왘 Press button s. control system stores the dialed The control system dials the selected
The system dials the selected phone number in the redial memory. phone number.
number.

148
Controls in detail
Manual transmission
왔 Manual transmission
Manual transmission is standard
equipment on select models and not
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G
available on all models.
leaves can come into contact with the hot On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
For information on driving with a manual exhaust system, as these materials could be in order to obtain braking action. This could
transmission, see “Manual transmission” ignited and cause a vehicle fire. result in drive wheel slip and reduced
(컄 page 46). vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
Warning! G Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
Warning! G
mission, getting out of your vehicle with the
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
gearshift lever not engaged in first or Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
reverse gear and parking brake engaged is structing the pedals’ range of movement.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
dangerous. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
could move the gearshift lever, which could
Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
result in an accident and/or serious person-
first or reverse gear alone may not prevent the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
al injury.
your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting have sufficient clearance.
people or objects. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
Always set the parking brake in addition to the objects could get caught between or be-
engaging first or reverse gear (컄 page 54). neath the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate. This could lead to acci-
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
dents and injury.
towards the road curb.

149
Controls in detail
Manual transmission

! When you are shifting into the 5th or 6th Shifting into reverse
gear, make sure that you press the gearshift le-
ver to the right. Otherwise, you could accidental- ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi-
ly shift into the 3th or 4th gear and damage the cle is stationary, as the transmission could oth-
transmission. erwise be damaged.
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the 왘 Stop the vehicle completely.
engine can result in engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran- 왘 Fully depress clutch pedal.
ty.
왘 Move the gearshift lever to neutral
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using position (no gear selected).
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- 왘 Move the gearshift lever to the left until
ited Warranty. you feel a certain resistance.
Do not exceed the engine speed limits. Refer to 왘 Push the gearshift lever past this
tachometer (컄 page 120) for engine speeds.
resistance.
왘 Then move the gearshift lever forward
into position R.

150
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
왔 Automatic transmission*
Automatic transmission is standard Gear selector lever
equipment on select models and available Warning! G
as optional equipment on select other The gear selector lever is located on the
models. Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- lower part of the center console.
structing the pedals’ range of movement.
For more information on driving with an Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
automatic transmission, see “Automatic cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
transmission*” (컄 page 47). the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear have sufficient clearance.
shifting process to your individual driving During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
style by continually adjusting the shift the objects could get caught between or be-
points up or down. These shift point adjust- neath the pedals. You could then no longer
ments are performed based on current brake or accelerate. This could lead to acci-
operating and driving conditions. dents and injury.
If the operating conditions change, the Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program. P Park position
R Reverse gear
i During the brief warm-up, transmission N Neutral
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic D Drive position
converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature. i The current gear selector lever position P,
R, N or D appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 153).

151
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.


Warning! G Do not place full load on the engine until the
The automatic transmission selects indi- operating temperature has been reached.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
lever out of park position P or neutral when the vehicle is stopped.
앫 gear selector lever position D
position N if the engine speed is higher than
(컄 page 153) with gear ranges Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the on slippery road surfaces. This may cause seri-
(컄 page 156)
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate ous damage to the drivetrain which is not cov-
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose 앫 the selected program mode (C/S) ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or (컄 page 157)
When the gear selector lever is in drive
something. Only shift into gear when the 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal position D, you can influence transmission
engine is idling normally and when your right (컄 page 155) shifting by:
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
앫 the vehicle speed 앫 limiting the gear range
An additional indication of the current gear 앫 changing gears manually
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.

152
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Gear selector lever positions Effect Effect


The current gear selector lever position Rather, the driver should always ë Neutral
appears in the multifunction display. set the parking brake in addition
No power is transmitted from the
to placing the gear selector lever
engine to the drive axle. When
in park position P to secure the
the brakes are released, the
vehicle.
vehicle can be moved freely
The SmartKey can only be (pushed or towed).
removed from the starter switch To avoid damage to the trans-
with the gear selector lever in
mission, never engage neutral
park position P. With the
position N while driving.
SmartKey removed, the gear
selector lever is locked in park If the ESP® is deactivated or
position P. malfunctioning:
1 Current gear selector lever position Move gear selector lever to neu-
If the vehicle’s electrical system
tral position N only if the vehicle
is malfunctioning, the gear
Effect is in danger of skidding, e.g. on
selector lever could remain
ì Park position icy roads.
locked in park position P
Gear selector lever position (컄 page 363). ê Drive
when the vehicle is parked. Place í Reverse gear The transmission shifts
gear selector lever in park automatically. All forward gears
Place gear selector lever in are available.
position P only when vehicle is
position R only when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not
stopped.
intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked.

153
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other


reason with gear selector lever in neutral Warning! G Warning! G
position N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Position P alone is not intended to or capa- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Limited Warranty. ble of preventing your vehicle from moving, SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
possibly hitting people or objects. Always with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
set the parking brake in addition to shifting children unattended in the vehicle, or with
to park position P (컄 page 54). access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
When parked on an incline, turn the front could move the gear selector lever from
wheels towards the road curb. park position P, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or Getting out of your vehicle without taking
leaves can come into contact with the hot the above measurements to secure it is
exhaust system, as these materials could be dangerous.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

154
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Driving tips Stopping Working on the vehicle


When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
Accelerator position 왘 Leave the transmission in gear. Warning! G
Your driving style influences the 왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake. When working on the vehicle, set the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
When you stop for a longer period of time parking brake and move gear selector lever
Less throttle Earlier upshifting with the engine idling and/or on a hill: to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle
More throttle Later upshifting could roll away.
왘 Set the parking brake.
Kickdown 왘 Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration. Maneuvering
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of When you maneuver in tight areas,
resistance. e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
Depending on the engine speed the 왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
transmission shifts into a lower gear. releasing the brakes.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have 왘 Accelerate gently.
reached the desired speed.
왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
The transmission shifts up again.

155
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Gear ranges Effect Effect


With the gear selector lever in drive ï The transmission shifts through ç The transmission shifts through
position D, you can select a gear range for sixth gear only (applies to second gear only.
the automatic transmission to operate vehicles with 7-speed automatic
Allows the use of engine’s
within. transmission only).
braking power when driving
You can limit the gear range by pressing î The transmission shifts through 앫 on steep downgrades
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and fifth gear only (applies to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic 앫 in mountainous regions
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+) transmission only). 앫 under extreme operating
(컄 page 158). é The transmission shifts through conditions
The selected gear range appears in the fourth gear only. æ The transmission operates in
multifunction display. è The transmission shifts through first gear only.
third gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
With this selection you can use braking effect on very steep or
the braking effect of the engine. lengthy downgrades.

1 Current gear range

156
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Automatic shift program The selected program mode appears in the 왘 Press program mode selector switch
multifunction display. repeatedly until the letter of the
The program mode selector switch is desired program mode appears in the
located on the lower part of the center multifunction display.
console.
Select C for comfort driving:
앫 The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫 Traction and driving stability are
1 Selected program mode (comfort or improved on icy roads.
sport)
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when
Program mode selector switch ! Never change the program mode when the you give more gas. The engine then
gear selector lever is out of park position P. This operates at lower rpms and the
C Comfort For comfort driving could result in a change of driving characteristics wheels are less likely to spin.
S Sport For standard driving for which you may not be prepared.
Select S for standard driving:
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted. 앫 The vehicle starts out in first gear.
앫 Upshifts occur later.

157
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

One-touch gearshifting Limiting gear range Extending gear range


왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
Warning! G the right in the D+ direction.
range. The transmission will shift to the next
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
higher gear as permitted by the shift
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. in order to obtain braking action. This could
program. This action simultaneously
Do not place full load on the engine until the result in drive wheel slip and reduced
operating temperature has been reached. extends the gear range of the transmis-
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
sion.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only prevent this type of loss of control.
when the vehicle is stopped. i If you press on the accelerator when the en-
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to
on slippery road surfaces. This may cause seri- will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
the left in the D- direction.
ous damage to the drivetrain which is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmis-
sion (컄 page 156).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.

158
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Canceling gear range limit Shifting into optimal gear range Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in in the D- direction.
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-
the multifunction display (컄 page 153).
The transmission will automatically sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
The transmission will shift from the select the gear range suited for optimal no longer shifts, the transmission is most
current gear range directly to gear acceleration and deceleration. This will likely operating in limp-home (emergency
range D. involve shifting down one or more operation) mode. In this mode only second
gears. gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
position D (for second gear) or
position R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

159
Controls in detail
Good visibility

For information on the windshield wipers, i The headlamps will automatically be Rear view mirrors
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 51). cleaned when you have
앫 switched on the headlamps For more information on setting the rear
Headlamp cleaning system* view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 41).
and
The button is located on the left side of the 앫 operated the windshield wipers with wind- Interior rear view mirror,
dashboard. shield washer fluid fifteen times antiglare position
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄 page 280).

1 Headlamp washer button 1 Lever


왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). 왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
by moving lever 1 towards the wind-
왘 Press button 1.
shield.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
high-pressure water jet.

160
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*


The reflection brightness of the exterior
react, for example, if the rear window
sunshade* is in raised position.
Warning! G
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles Exercise care when using the passen-
the interior rear view mirror will respond (incident light) could blind you. As a result, ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
automatically to glare when you may not be able to observe traffic con- surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
앫 the ignition is switched on ditions and could cause an accident. for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
and
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on Warning! G shoulder before changing lanes.
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror. In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
Sun visors
may escape from the mirror housing if the
The rear view mirror will not react if
mirror glass breaks. The sun visors protect you from sun glare
앫 reverse gear R is engaged
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not while driving.
앫 the interior lighting is turned on allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
Warning! G
Warning! G In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
The auto-dimming function does not react if necessary.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
incoming light is not aimed directly at
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
sensors in the interior rear view mirror. ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with glare can endanger you and others.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior the vehicle paint finish can be completely re-
moved only while in the liquid state and by apply-
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
ing plenty of water.

161
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear window sunshade*


Warning! G
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
When operating the rear window sunshade, with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
make sure there is no danger of anyone be- children unattended in the vehicle, or with
ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce- access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
dure. unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
The raising or lowering procedure can be
1 Mounting personal injury.
immediately halted by briefly pressing the
2 Vanity mirror cover switch.
3 Vanity mirror lamp The switch is located in the center console.
Briefly press switch again to raise or lower
4 Sun visor
the rear window sunshade completely.
왘 Swing sun visor 4 down when you
experience glare.
왘 To use illuminated vanity mirror, lift up
vanity mirror cover 2.
i If sun visor 4 is disengaged from
mounting 1 with vanity mirror cover 2 open,
vanity mirror lamp 3 will switch off.

i If sunlight enters through a side window, 1 Rear window sunshade switch


close vanity mirror cover 2 (if open), disengage
sun visor 4 from mounting 1 and pivot to the
side.

162
Controls in detail
Good visibility

! Make sure that the movement of the rear Rear window defroster Activating
window sunshade is not restricted by objects on
왘 Press button F or 1 in the
the rear window shelf. Otherwise, the sunshade The rear window defroster uses a large
or the objects could be damaged. climate control panel (컄 page 165) or
amount of power. To keep the battery
automatic climate control panel*
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). drain to a minimum, switch off the
(컄 page 175).
defroster as soon as the rear window is
Always raise or lower the sunshade fully clear. The indicator lamp on the button
for its support against the window frame. comes on.
The defroster is automatically deactivated
Raising or lowering the sunshade after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of op-
Deactivating
eration depending on the outside tempera-
왘 Press switch 1 briefly. ture. 왘 Press button F or 1 again.
The sunshade is raised or lowered com- The indicator lamp on the button goes
pletely. Warning! G out.

Stopping the raising or lowering Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
! If the rear window defroster switches off too
procedure soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this
removed from the rear window before means that too many electrical consumers are
왘 Press switch 1 again. driving. Visibility could otherwise be operating simultaneously and there is insuffi-
impaired, endangering you and others. cient voltage in the battery. The system re-
The sunshade stops. sponds automatically by deactivating the rear
window defroster.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster automatically turns itself
back on.

163
Controls in detail
Climate control

USA standard equipped with climate control, depending on vehicle production date. Canada standard equipped with climate control.

164
Controls in detail
Climate control

Item Item
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed 1 Air volume control
2 Left side air vent, adjustable 2 Left side temperature control
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control 3 Right side temperature control
for left side air vent 4 Air distribution control
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control 5 Rear window defroster
for left center air vent
6 AC cooling on/off
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
USA only (depending on vehicle production
7 Air distribution and air volume
6 Right center air vent, adjustable (automatic mode)
date)
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control 8 Air recirculation
for right center air vent
9 Front defroster
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable
a Right side defroster vent, fixed
b Climate control panel

i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders Canada only


for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.

165
Controls in detail
Climate control

The climate control is operational when- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
ever the engine is running. You can oper- odors are filtered out before outside air en- may require replacement of the filter before its
ate the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. the air volume to the interior.
cools or heats the interior depending on The air conditioning will not engage (no
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
the selected interior temperature and the before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated ture” (컄 page 223). The climate control will then
current outside temperature. (컄 page 172). adjust the interior temperature to the set value
much faster.
Warning! G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris.
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat- Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
that enters the passenger compartment air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
through the air vents can be very hot or very window.
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
cold (depending on the set temperature).
impairing visibility and endangering you and
This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro-
others.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents. Always keep sufficient distance be-
tween unprotected parts of the body and the
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribu-
tion control (컄 page 168) to direct the air to
air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
in the immediate area of unprotected skin.

166
Controls in detail
Climate control

Deactivating the climate control Operating the climate control system 왘 Use temperature controls 2 and 3
system in automatic mode (컄 page 165) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the
i When operating the climate control system passenger compartment.
Warning! G in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
The temperature of the vehicle interior
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-
bution. is adjusted automatically.
When the climate control is switched off, the
outside air supply and circulation are also In automatic mode, the dehumidify function is
switched on when the system is cooling. If nec- Deactivating
switched off. Only choose this setting for a
short time. Otherwise the windows could essary, this function can be switched off by 왘 Press button U (컄 page 165) again.
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering pushing the 2 button.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
you and others.
Activating out. The automatic operation of air vol-
ume and air distribution switches off.
Deactivating 왘 Press button U (컄 page 165) while
the engine is running.
왘 Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 165)
to position 0. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distri-
Reactivating bution are adjusted automatically.
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘 Set air volume control 1 (컄 page 165)
to any speed.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.

167
Controls in detail
Climate control

Setting the temperature Decreasing Adjusting air distribution and volume


왘 Turn temperature control 2
Use temperature controls 2 and 3 Use air distribution control 4
and/or 3 (컄 page 165) slightly coun-
(컄 page 165) to separately adjust the air (컄 page 165) to adjust the air distribution.
terclockwise.
temperature on each side of the passenger The following symbols are located on the
compartment. You should raise or lower The climate control system will corre- controls:
the temperature setting in small incre- spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). perature. Symbol Function
The climate control will adjust to the set a Directs air through the center,
temperature as fast as possible.
i If you turn the temperature control fully
counterclockwise for one side of the vehicle, you side and rear passenger
are decreasing the temperature for the other compartment air vents
Increasing side of the vehicle as well.
Z Directs air to the windshield
왘 Turn temperature control 2 and the side defroster vents
and/or 3 (컄 page 165) slightly clock-
wise.
b Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
The climate control system will corre-
Y Directs air to the footwells
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
i If you turn the temperature control fully
clockwise for one side of the vehicle, you are in-
creasing the temperature for the other side of
the vehicle as well.

168
Controls in detail
Climate control

왘 Press button U (컄 page 165). Adjusting air volume Front defroster


The indicator lamp on the button goes
Six blower speeds are available. You can use this setting to defrost the
out. The automatic air distribution is
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
switched off. The air distribution is 왘 Press button U (컄 page 165).
You can also defog the windshield and the
controlled according to the selected The indicator lamp in the button goes side windows.
control setting. out. The automatic air volume control
왘 Turn air distribution control 4 is switched off. The air volume is i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
(컄 page 165) to the desired symbol. adjusted according to the currently
selected setting.
Activating
Opening center and side air vents 왘 Use the air volume control 1
왘 Press button P or 0
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8 (컄 page 165) to adjust the air volume.
(컄 page 165).
(컄 page 164) upward.
The indicator lamp on the button
The center air vents 5 and 6 and side
comes on.
air vents 2 and 9 are open.
The air conditioning switches
Closing center and side air vents automatically to the following functions:
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8 앫 maximum blowing and heating
(컄 page 164) downward. power
The center air vents 5 and 6 and side 앫 air flows onto the windshield and
air vents 2 and 9 are closed. the front side windows
앫 the air recirculation mode is
switched off

169
Controls in detail
Climate control

i If you have switched on the defrost function Air recirculation mode Activating
using the P or 0 button, you cannot
왘 Press button , (컄 page 165).
make any other settings. Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button
Deactivating from the outside (e.g. before driving comes on.
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
왘 Press button P or 0 i The air recirculation mode is activated auto-
intake of outside air and recirculates the
(컄 page 165) again. matically at high outside temperatures.
air in the passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on the button goes The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is automatically
out. Defrosting is turned off.
Warning! G switched on.
i The cooling remains switched on. A quantity of outside air is added after approxi-
Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- mately 30 minutes.
Windshield fogged on the outside ing you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
i Keep this setting selected only until the recirculation mode immediately should clear
windshield is clear again.
interior window fogging. If interior window
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on fogging persists, make sure the air
(컄 page 51). conditioning (컄 page 172) is activated, or
If the automatic mode of the climate con- press button P or 0.
trol is switched off:
왘 Turn air distribution control 4
to a or Y (컄 page 165).

170
Controls in detail
Climate control

Deactivating Convenience closing


When using the air recirculation mode with
왘 Press button , (컄 page 165). convenience closing feature, should the up- 왘 Press button , (컄 page 165) for
ward movement of a window be blocked by approximately 2 seconds.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
some obstructions including but not limited
out. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic
will close. You can release button ,
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au- reversal feature will not operate.
once the closing procedure has begun.
tomatically:
In the event that the closing procedure The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is causes potential danger, the closing of the continue closing until they are fully
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
side windows can be immediately halted by closed. The indicator lamp on the but-
앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is pressing or pulling the respective window ton comes on. The air recirculation
turned off switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding mode is activated.
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature sunroof* can be immediately halted by
is above approximately 41°F (5°C) moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in Convenience opening
the overhead control panel in any direction.
Air recirculation mode with conve- 왘 Press button , for approximately
The closing of the side windows and 2 seconds.
nience closing or opening feature
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
again pressing and holding the , button.
Warning! G will return to their previous position.
You can release button , once the
Never operate the side windows and the opening procedure has begun. The win-
tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility dows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
of anyone being harmed by the closing pro- opening until they have reached their
cedure. previous position. The indicator lamp
on the button goes out. The air recircu-
lation mode is deactivated.

171
Controls in detail
Climate control

i A side window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will Activating


only return to its previous position if it has not Warning! G Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
been moved to another position using the re-
spective side window switch or tilt/sliding sun- If you turn off the cooling function, the dehumidify the air with the air condition-
roof* switch after it was closed with vehicle will not be cooled when weather ing.
button ,. A side window or tilt/sliding sun- conditions are warm. The windows can fog 왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 165).
roof* that was moved will remain in its current up more quickly. Window fogging may
position if button , is used to re-open the re- The indicator lamp on the button
impair visibility and endanger you and
maining side windows or tilt/sliding sunroof*. comes on.
others.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
Air conditioning
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
Deactivating
The cooling function, only operational which are harmful to the ozone layer.
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
when the engine is running, cools the vehi- ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
cle interior down to the selected tempera- again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
control system. The air in the vehicle will
ture. The cooling function also losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it-
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. self off.
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging 왘 Press button 2 (컄 page 165). Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
up. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
i Condensation may drip out from underneath out.
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication The cooling function switches off after
of a malfunction.
a short delay.

172
Controls in detail
Climate control

Rear passenger compartment Adjusting air distribution


adjustable air vents
왘 Push the slide for the left center
vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
left, right, up, or down.
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel (컄 page 165). The air flow is directed in the corre-
sponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 1
and 3 for the rear passenger compartment is i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
the same as at the dashboard center air vents. for the center air vents 1 and 3 upward.
The air vents for the rear passenger 1 Left center air vent
compartment are located in the rear Adjusting air volume
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center console. center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
3 Right center air vent The air volume is increased or
decreased.

173
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

USA standard equipped with automatic climate control, depending on vehicle production date.
Automatic climate control* optional for Canada.

174
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Item Item
1 Left side defroster vent, fixed 1 Left side air distribution control
2 Left side air vent, adjustable 2 Front defroster
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control 3 Temperature control, left, raising
for left side air vent 4 Display
4 Thumbwheel for air volume control 5 Air volume control, raising
for left center air vent
6 Temperature control, right, raising
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
USA only (depending on vehicle production
7 Rear window defroster
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
date) 8 Right side air distribution control
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent 9 Charcoal filter

8 Thumbwheel for air volume control a AC cooling on/off


for right side air vent Residual heat/ventilation
9 Right side air vent, adjustable b Temperature control, right, lowering
a Right side defroster vent, fixed c Air volume control, lowering
b Automatic climate control panel d Temperature control, left, lowering
e Air recirculation
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders Canada only f Automatic climate control on/off
for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
(complete system)
g Air distribution and air volume
(automatic mode)

175
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

The automatic climate control is operation- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
al whenever the engine is running. You can odors are filtered out before outside air may require replacement of the filter before its
operate the automatic climate control sys- enters the passenger compartment scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
tem in either the automatic or manual through the air distribution system. the air volume to the interior.
mode. The system cools or heats the inte- The air conditioning will not engage (no
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
rior depending on the selected interior before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated ture” (컄 page 223). The automatic climate con-
temperature and the current outside tem- (컄 page 184). trol will then adjust the interior temperature to
perature.
the set value much faster.

Warning! G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris.
Follow the recommended settings for Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
When operating the automatic climate air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
heating and cooling given on the following
control, the air that enters the passenger window.
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
compartment through the air vents can be
impairing visibility and endangering you and
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
others.
temperature). This may cause burns or frost-
bite on unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution control (컄 page 178) to
direct the air to air vents in the vehicle
interior that are not in the immediate area of
unprotected skin.

176
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Deactivating the automatic climate Operating the automatic climate con-


control system trol system in automatic mode

i When operating the automatic climate con-


Warning! G trol system in automatic mode, you will only rare-
ly need to adjust the temperature, air volume
When the automatic climate control is and air distribution.
1 Temperature, left
switched off, the outside air supply and cir- In automatic mode, the dehumidify function is
switched on when the system is cooling. If nec- 2 Blower speed
culation are also switched off. Only choose
essary, this function can be switched off by 3 Temperature, right
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility pushing the button 2 or 9 (컄 page 175). 왘 Use temperature controls 3 and
and endangering you and others. i You can switch the automatic climate con- d or 6 and b (컄 page 175) to sepa-
trol system on and off for each side of the pas- rately adjust the air temperature on
Deactivating senger compartment as desired. each side of the passenger compart-
ment.
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 175). Activating The temperature of the vehicle interior
The indicator lamp on the button 왘 Press button U (컄 page 175) while is adjusted automatically.
comes on. the engine is running.
Deactivating
Reactivating The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distri- 왘 Press button U (컄 page 175) again.
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 175). bution are adjusted automatically. The indicator lamp on the button goes
The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The automatic operation of air vol-
out. The previous settings are once ume and air distribution switches off.
again in effect.

177
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Setting the temperature Decreasing Adjusting air distribution


왘 Press temperature button b
Use temperature controls 3 and d for Use air distribution controls 1 and 8
and/or d (컄 page 175) until the de-
the left side or 6 and b for the right side (컄 page 175) to separately adjust the air
sired temperature appears in the
(컄 page 175) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger
display 4 (컄 page 175).
temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are
compartment. You should raise or lower The automatic climate control system found on the controls:
the temperature setting in small incre- will correspondingly adjust the interior
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). air temperature. Symbol Function
The automatic climate control will adjust a Directs air through the center,
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
i If you decrease the temperature for one side
of the vehicle to the lowest adjustable value then side and rear passenger
you will see the message LO in the display. This compartment air vents
Increasing also decreases the temperature for the other
side of the vehicle.
Z Directs air to the windshield
왘 Press temperature button 3 and the side defroster vents
and/or 6 (컄 page 175) until the de-
sired temperature appears in the
b Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior
display 4 (컄 page 175).
Y Directs air to the footwells
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
왘 Turn air distribution control 1 or 8
air temperature.
(컄 page 175) to the desired symbol.
i If you increase the temperature for one side The indicator lamp on the button U
of the vehicle to the highest adjustable value
then you will see the message HI in the display. (컄 page 175) goes out.
This also increases the temperature for the other
side of the vehicle.

178
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

The automatic air distribution is Adjusting air volume Front defroster


switched off. The air distribution is
controlled according to the selected Use button U (컄 page 175) for auto- You can use this setting to defrost the
control setting. matic mode or air volume controls  windshield, for example if it is iced up.
or Q (컄 page 175) to adjust air volume You can also defog the windshield and the
i You can also turn the air distribution control manually. side windows.
to a position between two symbols.
Seven blower speeds are available. i Keep this setting selected only until the
Opening center and side air vents windshield or the side windows are clear again.
왘 Press button  to decrease
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8 or Q (컄 page 175) to increase air
volume to the desired level. Activating
(컄 page 174) upward.
왘 Press button P or 0
The center air vents 5 and 6 and side The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out. (컄 page 175).
air vents 2 and 9 (컄 page 175) are
open. The automatic air distribution remains The indicator lamp on the button
switched on. comes on.
Closing center and side air vents The air conditioning switches
왘 Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8 automatically to the following functions:
(컄 page 174) downward. 앫 cooling on to dehumidify
The center air vents 5 and 6 and side 앫 maximum blowing and heating
air vents 2 and 9 (컄 page 174) are power
closed.
앫 air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫 the air recirculation mode is
switched off

179
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

i If you have switched on the defrost function Windshield fogged on the outside Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
using the P or 0 button, you cannot
make any other settings. i Keep this setting selected only until the If the left and right air distribution controls
windshield is clear again.
as well as the airflow volume control are
Deactivating 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on set to U (컄 page 175) and there is a
(컄 page 51). high need for cooling, the display
왘 Press button P or 0
“MAXCOOL” appears.
(컄 page 175) again. If the automatic mode of the automatic cli-
mate control is switched off: This provides the fastest possible cooling
The indicator lamp on the button goes
왘 Turn air distribution control 1 or 8 of the vehicle interior (when side windows
out.
to a or Y (컄 page 175). and tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed).
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i The cooling remains switched on.

180
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Air recirculation mode Activating Deactivating


왘 Press button , (컄 page 175). 왘 Press button , (컄 page 175) again.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button goes
from the outside (e.g. before driving comes on. out.
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au-
matically at high outside temperatures. tomatically:
air in the passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on the button , is not lit 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
when the air recirculation mode is automatically below approximately 41°F (5°C)
Warning! G switched on. 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
A quantity of outside air is added after approxi- turned off
Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- mately 30 minutes. 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
ing you and others. If the windows begin to is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 175) is activated, or
press button P or 0.

181
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Air recirculation mode with conve- Convenience opening


The closing of the side windows and
nience closing or opening feature
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by 왘 Press button , for approximately
again pressing and holding the , button. 2 seconds.
Warning! G The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
Convenience closing will return to their previous position.
Never operate the side windows and the
왘 Press button , (컄 page 165) for You can release button , once the
tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
approximately 2 seconds. opening procedure has begun. The win-
of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
dows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
cedure. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
opening until they have reached their
When using the air recirculation mode with will close. You can release button ,
previous position. The indicator lamp
convenience closing feature, should the up- once the closing procedure has begun.
on the button goes out. The air recircu-
ward movement of a window be blocked by The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
lation mode is deactivated.
some obstructions including but not limited continue closing until they are fully
to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic closed. The indicator lamp on the but- i A side window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will
ton comes on. The air recirculation only return to its previous position if it has not
reversal feature will not operate.
mode is activated. been moved to another position using the re-
In the event that the closing procedure spective side window switch or tilt/sliding sun-
causes potential danger, the closing of the roof* switch after it was closed with
side windows can be immediately halted by button ,. A side window or tilt/sliding sun-
roof* that was moved will remain in its current
pressing or pulling the respective window
position if button , is used to re-open the re-
switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding maining side windows or tilt/sliding sunroof*.
sunroof* can be immediately halted by
moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in
the overhead control panel in any direction.

182
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Charcoal filter Activating


왘 Press button e (컄 page 175).
Warning! G
An activated charcoal filter markedly
reduces bad odors and removes pollutants The indicator lamp on the button Never operate the side windows and the
from air entering the passenger compart- comes on. tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
ment. The charcoal filter can be activated of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
or deactivated.
i If you press and hold button e, the side cedure.
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will close.
The system switches automatically to the When using the charcoal filter with conve-
air recirculation mode, if the i The activated charcoal filter should be nience closing feature, should the upward
switched off when windows fog up on the inside,
movement of a window be blocked by some
앫 charcoal filter is switched on or if the passenger compartment needs to be
quickly heated or cooled down. obstructions including but not limited to
앫 carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic re-
oxide (NOX) concentration of the out- versal feature will not operate.
side air increases beyond a predeter- In the event that the closing procedure
mined level causes potential danger, the closing of the
i The automatic air recirculation mode does side windows can be immediately halted by
not function if the A/C mode is deactivated (in- pressing or pulling the respective window
dicator lamp on button 2 or 9 not lit), or switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding
if the outside temperature has fallen below 41°F sunroof* can be immediately halted by
(5°C). moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in
the overhead control panel in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the button e.

183
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Deactivating Air conditioning Deactivating


왘 Press button e (컄 page 175). It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
The cooling function, only operational
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
The indicator lamp on the button goes when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
climate control system. The air in the
out. cle interior down to the selected tempera-
vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
ture. The cooling function also
i Press and hold button e for approx. dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
dehumidified.
2 seconds. The side windows and or tilt/sliding
sunroof* will return to their previous position. thus preventing the windows from fogging 왘 Press button 2 or 9
You can release button e once the opening up. (컄 page 175).
procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/slid- The indicator lamp on the button goes
ing sunroof* continue opening until they have i Condensation may drip out from underneath
reached their previous position. the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication out.
of a malfunction.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will only return The cooling function switches off after
to its previous position if it has not been moved a short delay.
to another position using the respective window Warning! G
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof* switch after it was
closed with button e. A window or tilt/slid- If you turn off the cooling function, the
ing sunroof* that was moved will remain in its vehicle will not be cooled when weather
current position if button e is used to
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
re-open the remaining windows or tilt/sliding
sunroof*. up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.

184
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Activating Residual heat and ventilation Activating


(Canada only)
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 32).
dehumidify the air with the air condi-
With the engine switched off, it is possible 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 175).
tioning.
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior The indicator lamp on the button
왘 Press button 2 or 9 for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes comes on.
(컄 page 175) again. use of the residual heat produced by the
The indicator lamp on the button engine. Deactivating
comes on. i How long the system will provide heating de- 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 175).
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant pends on
The indicator lamp on the button goes
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs 앫 the coolant temperature
out.
which are harmful to the ozone layer. 앫 the temperature set by the operator
The residual heat is automatically turned
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless
of the air distribution control setting. off:
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it- 앫 when the ignition is switched on
self off.
앫 after about 30 minutes
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 앫 if the battery voltage drops

185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Rear passenger compartment The air vents for the rear passenger Adjusting air distribution
adjustable air vents compartment are located in the rear
왘 Push the slide for the left center
center console.
vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
left, right, up, or down.
compartment is controlled via the auto-
matic climate control panel (컄 page 175). The air flow is directed in the
corresponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 1
and 3 for the rear passenger compartment is i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
the same as at the dashboard center air vents. for the center air vents 1 and 3 upward.

Adjusting air volume


왘 Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
1 Left center air vent The air volume is increased or
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for decreased.
center air vents
3 Right center air vent

186
Controls in detail
Audio system
왔 Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation Operating safety

These instructions are intended to help


you become familiar with your Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They con-
tain useful tips and a detailed description Any alterations made to electronic
of the user functions. components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
Warning! G radio*, and telephone* are interconnected.
When one of the components is not opera-
In order to avoid distraction which could tional or has not been removed/replaced
lead to an accident, the driver should enter properly, the function of other components
system settings with the vehicle at a may be impaired.
standstill and operate the system only when This condition might seriously impair the
road and traffic conditions permit. Always operating safety of your vehicle.
pay full attention to traffic conditions first
We recommend that you have any service
before operating system controls while
work on electronic components carried out
driving.
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your car is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.

187
Controls in detail
Audio system

Operating and display elements

188
Controls in detail
Audio system

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 CD changer mode selector 201 9 Speed dialing memory g Soft keys 190
(telephone) in descending h Volume 190
AUX mode selector 193
order
2 Single CD mode selector 204 j Switching on/off 190
a Accepting a call 212
3 Radio mode selector (telephone) k Manual tuning/seek tuning 195
(radio)
4 Mute function (radio) 196 b Telephone mode selector 208
Pause (CD) 208 Track search, reverse (CD) 207
c Speed dialing memory 210
(telephone) in ascending l Manual tuning/seek tuning 195
5 Volume distribution 192
order (radio)
6 Sound settings 191
d Terminating a call 213 Track search, 207
7 Display fast forward (CD)
(telephone)
8 Alphanumeric keypad
e CD slot
f CD ejection 204

189
Controls in detail
Audio system

Button and soft key operation Operation Switching off


왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
In these instructions, the alphanumeric
Switching the unit on/off or
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel) 왘 Press M button.
Switching on
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch i Should excessively high temperatures occur
“soft keys”. to position 1 or 2. while the audio system is being operated, the
display will dim. If temperatures continue to rise,
! Do not press directly in the display face. 왘 If the audio system was on as you HIGH TEMP will appear in the display, after which
Otherwise, the display will be damaged. removed the SmartKey from the starter the audio system will be switched off for a
switch, the audio system will cooling-down period.
automatically come back on as you
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2. Adjusting the volume
or 왘 Turn rotary control of N button.
왘 Press M button. The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i If the radio is switched on without the Smart-
Key in the starter switch, it will automatically i If your vehicle equipment includes a Mer-
switch off again after approx. 30 minutes. cedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you
If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone, the can adjust its volume separately from the volume
display may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM of the audio system while the telephone is being
network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network). used.

190
Controls in detail
Audio system

Adjusting sound functions The radio switches back to the Sound system*
standard radio menu 8 seconds after
The bass and treble functions are called up You can either program the sound settings
the last soft key is pressed.
by pressing the O button. manually (컄 page 191) or choose settings
via preset sound characteristics.
Settings for bass and treble are stored Adjusting treble
separately for the AM and FM wavebands, You can select from among the following
왘 Press O button repeatedly until
weather band, CD mode and telephone settings:
TREBLE appears in the display.
mode.
앫 STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.

Bass 앫 SURROUND: the sound is set for better


three-dimensional acoustic character-
왘 Press O button repeatedly until istics.
BASS appears in the display.
앫 SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the
spoken word.
왘 Press O button repeatedly until
왘 Press + or – soft key to increase or
STANDARD, SURROUND, or SPEECH appears
decrease tone level accordingly.
in the display.
or 왘 Press X or Y soft key repeatedly
왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble until the desired sound setting has
왘 Press + or – soft key to increase or tones to their center level. been reached.
decrease tone level accordingly. The radio switches back to the The sound is set accordingly.
or standard radio menu 8 seconds after or 컄컄
the last soft key is pressed.
왘 Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass
tones to their center level.

191
Controls in detail
Audio system

컄컄 왘 Press RES soft key briefly. 왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the respec- Fader
tive sound function is reset to its center
The sound setting is reset depending 왘 Press P button repeatedly until
level.
on the sound source activated. FADER appears in the display.
or
앫 Radio mode: STANDARD
왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
앫 CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
appears in the display.
앫 Telephone: SPEECH
The sound settings for bass and treble
The radio switches back to the are returned to their center level and
standard radio menu 8 seconds after the volume is set to a predefined level.
the last soft key is pressed.
Vehicles with sound system*:
왘 Press V or W soft key.
Returning sound functions to factory The sound setting is reset depending
The volume is distributed accordingly
settings on the sound source activated.
between the front and rear of the
왘 Press O button to call up settings 앫 Radio mode: STANDARD vehicle.
menu in the display.
앫 CD/AUX mode: SURROUND or
앫 Telephone: SPEECH 왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
The radio switches back to the The fader is reset to its center level.
standard radio menu 4 seconds
The radio switches back to the
after the last soft key is pressed.
standard radio menu 8 seconds after
the last soft key is pressed.
Adjusting volume distribution
Call up fader and balance functions by
pressing the P button.

192
Controls in detail
Audio system

Adjusting balance Returning volume distribution to Telephone* muting


factory settings
왘 Press P button repeatedly until If your vehicle equipment includes a
BALANCE appears in the display. 왘 Press P button to call up settings Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
menu in the display. telephone*, you can adjust its volume
separately from the volume of the audio
system while the telephone is being used.

Connecting an external audio source


(AUX) to the radio*
An optional dealer-installed cinch-connec-
왘 Press X or Y soft key. tor* for connecting an external audio
왘 Press RES soft key briefly; the source may become available for your
The volume is distributed between the vehicle model. Feature description is
respective volume distribution is reset
left and right sides of the vehicle. based on preliminary information at time
to its center (flat) level.
or of printing. Contact an authorized
or Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
왘 Press RES soft key briefly.
왘 Press and hold RES soft key until RESET You can adjust the volume (컄 page 190),
The balance is reset to its center level. appears in the display. the sound settings (컄 page 191) and the
The radio switches back to the The volume distribution settings for volume distribution (컄 page 192) for the
standard radio menu 8 seconds after fader and balance are set to their AUX input.
the last button is pressed. center level.
Calling up AUX mode
The radio switches back to the
standard radio menu 4 seconds after 왘 Press and hold Q button until AUX
the last soft key is pressed. appears in the display.

193
Controls in detail
Audio system

Canceling AUX mode 왘 Press WB soft key. 앫 Automatic seek tuning (컄 page 195)
왘 Press any audio source button. The weather band menu is called up. 앫 Scan search (컄 page 195)
The waveband currently selected 앫 Station memory (컄 page 195)
Radio operation
appears in the upper left-hand corner
앫 Automatic station memory (Autostore)
of the display.
(컄 page 196)
Selecting radio mode
Calling up wavebands for radios The station search proceeds in the
왘 Press b button.
with SAT following frequency increments:
Calling up wavebands 왘 Press FM, AM, or WB soft key repeatedly 앫 200 kHz in FM range
until desired waveband has been 앫 10 kHz in AM range
You can choose from among the FM, AM,
selected.
and WB wavebands.
The FM, AM, and WB wavebands are Direct frequency input
Weather band (컄 page 196).
called up one after another. 왘 Select desired waveband.
i FM waveband: 87.7......107.9 MHz
The waveband currently selected
AM waveband: 530......1710 KHz appears in the upper left-hand corner
of the display.
Calling up wavebands for radios
without SAT Selecting a station
왘 Press FM or AM soft key to switch The following options are available for
between FM and AM. selecting a station:
The FM and AM wavebands are called 앫 Direct frequency input (컄 page 194) 왘 Press * button.
up one after another. 왘 Enter desired frequency with
앫 Manual tuning (컄 page 195)
or buttons 1 to R.

194
Controls in detail
Audio system

i You can only enter frequencies within the re- i If no station is received after two The station last played will be
spective waveband. consecutive scans of the complete frequency selected and SC disappears from
If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds, the range, then the scan stops at the frequency from the display.
radio will return to the last station tuned. which it began.
Station memory
Manual tuning Scan search
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations
왘 Select desired waveband. 앫 Starting scan search in the memory.
왘 Select desired waveband.
왘 Press S or T button for approx. 앫 Storing stations
3 seconds. 왘 Tune in desired station.
왘 Press button repeatedly until desired 왘 Press and hold desired station
frequency has been reached. button 1 to R until a brief
Step-by-step station tuning takes place signal tone is heard.
in ascending or descending order. Each The frequency is stored on the
time the button is pressed, the radio selected station button.
tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During
왘 Press SC soft key. 앫 Calling up stations
manual tuning, the radio is muted.
SC will appear in the display. The 왘 Press desired station button 1
Automatic seek tuning radio briefly tunes in all receivable to R briefly.
stations on the waveband selected.
왘 Select desired waveband.
앫 Ending scan search
왘 Press S or T button briefly.
왘 Press SC soft key or S or T.
The radio will tune to the next highest
or next lowest receivable frequency.

195
Controls in detail
Audio system

Autostore – automatic station memory 앫 Calling up stations Weather band


The Autostore memory function provides 왘 Press desired station button 1
an additional memory level. The station to R.
memory for manually stored stations is not
앫 Leaving the Autostore memory level
overwritten.
왘 Press FM or AM soft key briefly.
앫 Calling up Autostore memory level and
storing stations Interrupting radio mode
The radio mode is interrupted by an 왘 Press WB soft key.
incoming call on the telephone*
The weather band station last received
(컄 page 212).
is tuned in.
앫 Mute on
Selecting a weather band station
왘 Press U button.
directly
The radio mode is interrupted and
왘 Press AS soft key briefly. 왘 Select desired weather band station
MUTED appears in the display.
with buttons 1 to 7.
The radio switches to the Autostore
앫 Mute off
memory level. AS and SEARCH If a station cannot be tuned in, a search
appear in the display and the radio 왘 Press U button. is automatically started.
finds the ten stations with the The radio mode is again active.
strongest signals. These stations
are stored on the station
buttons 1 to R in order of
signal strength.

196
Controls in detail
Audio system

Search Introduction to satellite radio* i Additional satellite radio equipment and a


(USA only) subscription to a satellite radio service provider
왘 Press S or T button to tune in
are required for the satellite radio operation de-
the next receivable weather band scribed here.
SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan-
station.
nels of digital-quality radio, among others Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
i If no weather band station is received after music, sports, news, and entertainment, for details and availability for your vehicle.
three consecutive scans of the complete fre- free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio Note that categories and channels shown in illus-
quency range, then the scan stops at the chan- uses a fleet of high-power satellites to trations are dependent on programming content
nel with which it began and NO WB FOUND broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to delivered by the service provider. Programming
appears in the display. content is subject to change. Therefore,
coast, in the contiguous U.S.
If this happens, switch back to standard radio channels and categories shown in illustrations
mode. This diverse, satellite-delivered program- and descriptions contained in this manual may
ming is available for a monthly subscrip- differ from the channels and categories
tion fee. delivered by the service provider.
Scan search
For more information and service
앫 Starting scan search availability call the SIRIUS Service
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable or
interrupted from time to time for a variety of rea-
왘 Press SC soft key. Center (컄 page 201), or contact sons, such as environmental or topographic con-
www.siriusradio.com. ditions and other things beyond the service
SC will appear in the display. The
provider’s or our control. Service might also not
radio briefly tunes in all receivable be available in certain places (e.g., in tunnels,
weather band stations. parking garages, or within or next to buildings) or
앫 Ending scan search near other technologies.

왘 Press SC soft key or S or T.


The weather band station last
played will be selected and SC
disappears from the display.

197
Controls in detail
Audio system

Program categories The telephone number of the SIRIUS i The system will tune to a default station if no
Service Center (888-539-7474) is station had been selected previously.
The channels are categorized. Categories
displayed.
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program (category mode) 왘 Press ESN soft key.
(컄 page 199).
The twelve-digit electronic serial
number (ESN) of the SAT tuner*
Calling up the SAT main menu
installed in your vehicle is displayed.
왘 Press SAT soft key. This information is required to call the
SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand SIRIUS Service Center for an activation
corner of the display. request. The first channel 001 is called up and the
PTY system changes to All categories.
Prior to activation of the satellite radio i Credit card information may also be
service (컄 page 198). required for your application. If no station can be received, ACQUIRING
The activation process takes approximately 5 to appears in the display.
After activation of satellite radio
service (컄 page 198). 10 minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Cen- If the Satellite radio service is not
ter. activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the
Prior to activation of the satellite radio radio display and NO SAT will appear in the
After activation of the satellite radio multifunction display.
service
service
The satellite radio main menu appears.
The radio station selected last is audible,
provided it can be received.

198
Controls in detail
Audio system

Selecting a station Accessing via number keys The system tunes to channel 16.
The following options are available: 왘 Enter number of preset you wish to The station you have selected begins to
select, e.g. 1. play.
앫 Selecting a station using the selected
category (컄 page 199). The radio plays the station stored i You can only enter available channel num-
under this number and the PTY function bers.
앫 Tuning via station presets
changes to the category corresponding
(컄 page 199).
to the station. Tuning via the program category list
앫 Tuning via scan search (컄 page 200).
The category list contains all currently
앫 Tuning via manual channel input Tuning via manual channel input
receivable categories of programs. It is
(컄 page 199). arranged alphabetically.
앫 Tuning via the program category list 앫 Selecting a category
(컄 page 199).
왘 Press PTY soft key.
Tuning via station presets
Ten satellite radio station presets are
available.
Example: tuning in channel 16
You can access the presets via number
keys. 왘 Press * button.
Input line appears in the main radio
menu.
The current PTY category of the
왘 Use number keys to enter desired station is displayed. 컄컄
channel within 8 seconds, e.g. 1
6.

199
Controls in detail
Audio system

컄컄 왘 Press X or Y soft key. 왘 Press and hold S or T Obtaining additional text information
button for approx. 3 seconds until
This switches between the Additional text information (artist, title)
desired station has been reached.
individual categories. related to the current channel can be
displayed.
When changing the category, the Tuning via scan search
channel selected last in the new 왘 Press INF soft key.
Scan search is characterized as follows:
category becomes audible.
The title being played is displayed.
앫 Scan search plays a channel for
The system will automatically switch to
approx. 8 seconds and then skips to 왘 Press INF soft key again.
a station of the selected category if the
currently selected station is not of the the next channel within the current cat- The name of the artist performing the
selected category. Otherwise, the egory. title being played is displayed.
currently selected station remains 앫 Scan search can be terminated
i If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds,
tuned. manually. the radio will return to the standard display.
앫 Tuning a station within the selected 왘 Press SC soft key.
category Storing stations
The search starts. SC appears in the
The channels identified for the display. 왘 Tune in desired station.
currently selected category are 왘 Press and hold desired station
왘 Press SC soft key again.
arranged numerically. Only one entry is button 1 to R until a brief signal
visible at a time. The search stops.
tone is heard.
왘 Press S or T button briefly. The frequency is stored on the selected
The next station within the category station button.
is started.
or

200
Controls in detail
Audio system

The radio saves the current station at CD mode


the memory preset selected. The Warning! G
memory preset selected appears in the
Safety precautions In order to avoid distraction which could
status line, e.g. S3.
lead to an accident, the driver should insert
i There are ten presets available. Warning! G CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
An existing entry is overwritten in the memory operate the audio system only if permitted
list when a new entry is given. The single CD player and the CD changer* by road, weather and traffic conditions.
are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Calling up the ESN information menu of invisible laser radiation if the housing is (approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a
왘 Press INF soft key. opened or damaged. distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
Do not open the housing. The single CD every second.
왘 Press ESN soft key. player and the CD changer* do not contain
The twelve-digit electronic serial any parts that can be serviced by the user. General notes
number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* For safety reasons, have any service work
installed in your vehicle is displayed. which may be necessary performed only by The system may not be able to play audio
qualified personnel. CDs with copy protection.
왘 Press RET soft key to exit the menu.
Playing copied CDs may cause
malfunctions during playback.
! If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can be-
come warped due to the heat that develops in
the CD drive or CD changer*.
In certain situations, the CDs can then no longer
be ejected and cause damage to the drive. Such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

201
Controls in detail
Audio system

! Your CD drive or CD changer* has been de- Tips on handling CDs Information on MP3 data carriers
signed to play CDs which correspond to the
앫 Handle CDs carefully to prevent i CD media, CD burning software and
EN 60908 standard. You can therefore only use
CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. interference during playback. CD writers are available in great variety. Due to
this variety, it cannot be guaranteed that the
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. ones that 앫 Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust CD changer will be able to play every
have data on both sides (one side with DVD data, on the CDs. user-written CD.
the other side with audio data), they cannot be
앫 Do not write on CDs or apply any labels The burning process can lead to data errors and
ejected and will damage the drive.
or other material to them. aging of the medium may result in data loss.
Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter, not Therefore, the CD changer may be restricted in
앫 Clean CDs from time to time with a its ability to play MP3 data carriers; it may play
even with a CD adapter. Attempting to play
CDs with an 8 cm diameter or playing such commercially available cleaning cloth. them with reduced sound quality, or it may not
CDs with an adapter may cause damage to Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; be able to play them at all.
the CD drive. Such damage is not covered instead, wipe it in a straight line start- Problems may be encountered during playback
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing in the center and moving outward. of user-written CDs with a storage capacity of
Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays, more than 700 MB. These CDs do not meet valid
Should excessively high or low tempera- etc. for cleaning. standards as of this printing.
tures occur while in CD changer mode*,
앫 Replace the CD in its case after use.
CD ERROR will appear in the display, and the Compatible MP3 data carriers
CD will be muted until the temperature has 앫 Protect CDs from heat and direct The CD changer can read the following
reached an acceptable level for the system sunlight. data carriers in MP3 mode:
to continue operation.
MP3 notes 앫 CD-DA
The single CD player play audio CDs, the
CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as The CD changer* can play audio CDs as 앫 CD-R
CDs with MP3 files. well as CDs with MP3 files. 앫 CD-RW

202
Controls in detail
Audio system

Compatible file systems and compres- Compatible bit and sampling rates Information on copyright
sion methods
Fixed and variable bit rates of up to The music tracks that you create for use in
Use Romeo or Joliet. Depending on file for- 320 kBit/s are possible. MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode
mat used, up to 128 characters are possi- are subject to copyright laws under appli-
The following table lists possible sampling
ble. cable international and national regula-
rates:
tions.
The following compression methods are
compatible: MPEG1 44.1 KHz, 48 KHz, In many countries, the reproduction of
Audio Layer3 32 KHZ copyrighted materials is not permitted,
앫 MP3
MPEG2 22.5 KHz, 24 KHz, even if only for personal use, without the
앫 WMA express prior consent of the copyright
Audio Layer3 16 KHz
앫 WAV holder.
MPEG2.5 11.025 KHz,
Audio Layer3 12 KHz, 8 KHz Please check the current copyright laws
for your country and comply with them.
WMA 32 KHz, 44.1 KHz,
48 KHz These restrictions do not apply, for exam-
ple, to your own compositions and record-
ings, or for recordings for which
i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of 128
kBit/s or higher and with the specified sampling authorization has been obtained from the
rates. copyright holder.
The use of rates other than those specified may
lead to noticeably inferior sound quality.

203
Controls in detail
Audio system

MP3 playback i Keep in mind that the single CD player in the 왘 Remove CD from slot.
audio system unit is not able to play CDs with
You can play an MP3 CD on the i If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot
MP3 files.
CD changer* as you would any standard within approx. 15 seconds, the system automat-
audio CD. All of the functions described for 왘 Make sure the system is switched on. ically pulls the CD back in and plays it.
the CD changer also apply for the playback 왘 Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of If a CD is pulled back in, press EJECT button for
of MP3 CDs. Keep in mind that the single the CD must face upwards. 5 seconds; the CD will then be ejected.
CD player in the audio system unit is not
able to read MP3 CDs. The system automatically pulls the CD Operational readiness of CD changer*
into the CD slot. The audio CD begins
The first 99 tracks on the CD, including to play. If a CD changer* has been installed in the
tracks in subdirectories, are recognized vehicle, it can be operated from the front
and played. Any additional tracks will not ! If a CD is already loaded, it must be ejected control panel of the audio system.
be played. before inserting a new CD. Inserting a second A loaded magazine must be installed to
CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will play CDs.
i Due to the branched data structure, play- cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the
back of the first track may be delayed slightly. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The CD changer* is located in the glove
box.
Operating the single CD player in the
i If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or can-
not be read, WRONG CD ERROR will appear in the
audio system unit display. Loading/unloading the CD magazine

Loading a CD i The CD changer* may not be able to play au-


Ejecting a CD dio CDs with copy protection.
The single CD player in the audio system 왘 Make sure the system is switched on. 왘 Slide changer door to the right and
unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot press g button.
for loading the drive is located underneath 왘 Press EJECT button.
the soft keys. The system ejects the CD. NO CD will 왘 Magazine will be ejected.
appear in the display.

204
Controls in detail
Audio system

왘 Push magazine into CD changer* 2 in After the last track on a CD has finished,
direction of arrow and close sliding the next CD is automatically played.
door.
Playing tracks
Playing CDs You have the following options:
Single CD player in the audio unit 앫 Audio system with CD changer*:
selecting CDs
왘 Press i button.
앫 Direct track entry
CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand
corner of the display. 앫 Track skip forward/reverse
1 CD
2 CD changer The CD will resume playback at the point 앫 Fast forward/reverse
3 CD tray where it was switched off. 앫 Scan
4 CD magazine
앫 Random tracks
왘 Remove magazine 4 and pull CD changer*
CD tray 3 fully out. 왘 Press Q button. 앫 Repeat track
왘 Place CD 1 in recess of tray, label side CD and the selected magazine slot
up. number appear in the upper left-hand
왘 Push tray into magazine in direction of corner of the display.
arrow. If you have not removed a CD since the last
time the CD audio source was activated,
i CDs which have been inserted improperly or
are unreadable will not be played. the last CD listened to will begin to play at
the point where it was switched off.

205
Controls in detail
Audio system

Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD Direct track entry Skipping tracks forward/backward
changer*
앫 Skipping tracks forward
왘 Press S button briefly.
The next track will be played.
앫 Skipping tracks backward
왘 Press T button briefly.
You can make a direct selection from If the track has been playing for
왘 You can select from among the among the tracks on a CD. more than 10 seconds, the unit
inserted CDs with buttons skips back to the beginning of the
왘 Press * button.
R to 6. track currently playing. If less than
왘 Enter track number using buttons 1 10 seconds have been played, the
R = CD player in the audio unit
to R. unit skips back to the beginning of
1 to 6 = CDs in the the previous track.
CD changer* The number of the track being played
appears next to TRACK in the display. Pressing the T or S button
The magazine slot number of the repeatedly will result in multiple tracks
selected CD appears next to CD in the You can only enter available track
being skipped.
display, and the number of the numbers.
currently played track appears next
to TRACK.
i If there is no CD in the selected magazine
slot, NO CD appears in the display with the cor-
responding slot number.

206
Controls in detail
Audio system

Fast forward/reverse Random play Repeat


앫 Fast forward The random function (RDM) plays the The track being played is repeated until the
tracks of the current CD in random order. repeat function is switched off.
왘 Press and hold S button until
desired point has been reached. i When you start the RDM function, the RPT i When you start the RPT function, the RDM
function is automatically switched off. function is automatically switched off.
앫 Reverse
앫 Switching on random 앫 Switching on repeat
왘 Press and hold T button until
desired point has been reached. 왘 Press RDM soft key. 왘 Press RPT soft key.
i The track number and the relative time of RDM appears in the display. RPT appears in the display.
the track is shown in the display during the A randomly selected track is
앫 Switching off repeat
search. played.
왘 Press RPT soft key again.
앫 Switching off random
Scan
왘 Press RDM soft key again.
앫 Starting scan
왘 Press SC soft key.
SC will appear in the display.
Each track on the current CD will be
played for approx. 8 seconds in as-
cending order.
앫 Ending scan
왘 Press SC soft key or T or S.

207
Controls in detail
Audio system

Pause function Track and time display GSM network phones


The CD changer mode is interrupted by an
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified
incoming call on the telephone*
mobile telephone*, a number of functions
(컄 page 212).
and operating steps can be performed and
앫 Switching on pause function displayed in the audio system display.
Further operating instructions not covered
here can be found in the operating instruc-
왘 Press T soft key. tions for the multifunction steering wheel
and the cellular telephone*.
The number of the track being played
and the elapsed playing time appear in If your audio system is set up for telephone
the display. operation, the t symbol will appear in
the display.
왘 Press U button. 왘 Press T soft key again.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
The CD changer mode is The total number of tracks and the total specified mobile telephone* into the
interrupted and PAUSE appears in playing time of the CD appear in the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to
the display. display. enter your PIN for 30 seconds
앫 Switching off pause function 왘 Press T soft key. (컄 page 209). This display disappears
when you press any button.
왘 Press U button. The standard CD playback menu
appears in the display. When your mobile telephone is inserted
The CD changer mode is active into the telephone cradle, you will see the
again. reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.

208
Controls in detail
Audio system

Switching on the telephone PIN entry i If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times,
NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK
Switching on the telephone via your telephone. Please refer to the separate
telephone operating instructions for more
왘 Press h button. information.
If the telephone was previously
switched off, PROCESSING appears in Adjusting the volume
the display and you will then be 왘 Turn rotary control of N button
prompted to enter your PIN. during a telephone call.
왘 Enter PIN number using buttons 1
Switching off the telephone to R. The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
왘 Press h button for approx. 왘 If necessary, correct number entered
3 seconds. with the CLR soft key. Press soft key i The volume can be adjusted separately for
briefly to delete the last digit entered; telephone mode and audio mode.
PROCESSING appears in the display until
press soft key and hold to delete the
the telephone is off. Afterward, Adjusting sound
complete number.
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
왘 Press OK soft key after entering correct 왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call.
PIN. Sound adjustment (컄 page 191).
왘 READY or ROAMING will appear in the
display.

209
Controls in detail
Audio system

Placing a call i If the telephone number has been saved to-


gether with a name in the telephone book, the
Entering a telephone number and name will appear in the display.
starting the dialing process
Phone book
The numbers stored in the phone book of
the telephone can be called up either by
name or number. 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the button ‚ or ƒ.
phone book. 왘 Press desired numerical key 2
i This is only possible, however, when the call to 9.
왘 Enter desired telephone number using
information transmitted includes the number of
buttons 1 to R. the person calling. If the telephone number is not
The stored entries are selected
according to the alphabetical order
The number can have up to 32 digits, transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the
phone book. of the initial letters (e.g. for
but only twelve of these are visible in
S -Smith, press button 7 four
the display. 앫 Searching and calling up telephone times).
왘 If necessary, correct number entered book entries by name
or
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key You can access your mobile
briefly to delete the last digit entered; telephone’s phone book using the 왘 Press and hold button ‚
press soft key and hold to delete the audio system. You can access both the or ƒ.
complete number. main entries and the sub-entries of The system jumps from one initial
왘 After correct telephone number has your phone book. letter to the next in ascending or
been entered, press s button. descending order.

210
Controls in detail
Audio system

왘 Press and hold button ‚ 왘 When you have selected a number, 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
or ƒ until desired initial letter press s button. button ‚ or ƒ.
has been reached.
The call will be made. 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls).
or
앫 Viewing the telephone number of a The number of received calls and
왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ telephone book entry then the call last received appear
repeatedly until desired entry has briefly in the display.
왘 Search for desired entry.
been reached.
왘 Select desired telephone number
왘 Press NUM soft key.
The stored entries are selected in with button ‚ or ƒ.
alphabetical order with the The telephone number of the phone
The letter R and the number of the
sub-entries. book entry appears in the display.
memory position appear in the
앫 Returning calls received upper left-hand corner of the
i Several sub-entries can be stored for each
main entry (name). These entries are marked by display. The numbers are stored in
a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the the order of the calls received.
upper left-hand corner of the display. The
following abbreviations for sub-entries are possi- 왘 When you have selected a number,
ble: press s button.
CEL = Mobile phone The call will be made.
HOM = Home
WOR = Work
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main

211
Controls in detail
Audio system

앫 Speed dial Redial The letter L and the number of the


memory position appears in the
If you have stored telephone numbers If the number you have dialed is busy, you
left-hand corner of the display. The
as speed dial numbers in your can again place calls to the last ten
numbers are stored in the order of
telephone, you can also enter these telephone numbers dialed using the redial
the calls received.
with buttons 1 to R on the radio function.
head unit. 왘 When you have selected a number,
i If you have activated the automatic redial press s button.
왘 Press desired button 1 to R function on your telephone, the number of the
briefly. person being called is automatically redialed af- The call will be made.
ter a short waiting period if there is a busy signal.
왘 Press s button. Refer to the separate operating instructions for Accepting an incoming call
The call will be made. the mobile telephone.
If the telephone is active in the background
앫 Turbo dial 앫 Manual redial
(reception symbol is visible in the display),
If you have stored telephone numbers the audio source is muted when an incom-
as turbo dial numbers in your ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
telephone, you can also enter these heard and the caller’s telephone number,
with buttons 1 to R on the radio or the name under which the telephone
head unit. number has been saved in the phone book,
appears in the display. If the caller’s
왘 Press desired button 1 to R number is not transmitted with the call,
until the call is made.
왘 Press s button. CALL will appear in the display.

The telephone number last dialed 왘 Press s button.


will appear in the display. The call is accepted.
왘 Select desired telephone number
with button ‚ or ƒ.

212
Controls in detail
Audio system

Muting a call Talking with two callers at the same You are connected with the second
time caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you. If you wish to receive or place another call 앫 Switching between calls
during an already active call, you can
앫 Mute on 왘 Press 2 and s buttons.
accept or place the second call and switch
왘 Press MUT soft key. between the callers or combine them into This switches between the calls.
one call. Note that the features described The non-active call is kept on hold.
왘 MIC MUTE will appear in the display.
here are depending on availability from 앫 Terminating a call
앫 Mute off your mobile phone service provider.
왘 Press t button.
왘 Press MUT soft key again. 앫 Placing/accepting a second call
The current call is terminated. You
Terminating a call 왘 Place new call by entering are again connected with the caller
telephone number manually. previously placed on hold.
왘 Press t button.
왘 Press s button. 앫 Combining two calls
The current call is terminated and the
muted audio source becomes active You are connected to the second 왘 Press 3 and s buttons.
again. caller; the first caller is kept on
hold. The calls are combined into one
call.
or
앫 Terminating a combined call
왘 Press s button to accept a
second call. 왘 Press t button.
The connection to both callers is
i You will be notified of the second call acous- terminated.
tically, but you will not see this in the display.

213
Controls in detail
Audio system

TDMA or CDMA network phones Switching on the telephone 왘 Press OK soft key after entering correct
code.
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified Switching on the telephone
The telephone is unlocked. If you have
mobile telephone*, a number of functions
왘 Press h button. entered an incorrect code, you must
and operating steps can be performed and
enter the correct code.
displayed in the audio system display. If you have programmed an unlock
code for the telephone, you must now
Further operating instructions not covered Switching off the telephone
enter the code.
here can be found in the operating instruc-
왘 Press h button for approx.
tions for the multifunction steering wheel
3 seconds.
and the mobile telephone*.
PROCESSING appears in the display until
If your audio system is set up for telephone
the telephone is off. Afterward,
operation, the t symbol will appear in
PHONE OFF appears in the display.
the display.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz Adjusting the volume
specified mobile telephone* into the 왘 Enter code using buttons 1 왘 Turn rotary control of N button
telephone cradle, you will be prompted to to R. during a telephone call.
enter your PIN for 30 seconds
(컄 page 209). This display disappears 왘 If necessary, correct number entered The volume will increase or decrease
when you press any button. with the CLR soft key. Press soft key depending on the direction turned.
briefly to delete the last digit entered;
When your mobile telephone is inserted press soft key and hold to delete the i The volume can be adjusted separately for
into the telephone cradle, you will see the complete number. telephone mode and audio mode.
reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.

214
Controls in detail
Audio system

Adjusting sound 왘 If necessary, correct number entered You can access your mobile
with the CLR soft key. Press soft key telephone’s phone book with the audio
왘 Adjust sound during a telephone call.
briefly to delete the last digit entered; system. You can access both the main
Sound adjustment (컄 page 191).
press soft key and hold to delete the entries and the sub-entries of your
complete number. phone book.
Placing a call
왘 After correct telephone number has
Entering a telephone number and been entered, press s button.
starting the dialing process
i If the telephone number has been saved to-
gether with a name in the phone book, the name
will appear in the display.

Phone book
왘 Press MEM soft key or press
The numbers stored in the phone book of
button ‚ or ƒ.
the mobile telephone can be called up
either by name or number. 왘 Press desired numerical key 2
왘 Enter desired telephone number using to 9.
In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
buttons 1 to R.
phone book. The stored entries are selected
The number can have up to 32 digits, according to the alphabetical order
but only twelve of these are visible in i This is only possible, however, when the call of the initial letters (e.g. for
information transmitted includes the number of
the display. S -Schneider, press button 7
the person calling. If the telephone number is not
transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the four times).
phone book. or 컄컄
앫 Searching and calling up phone book
entries by name

215
Controls in detail
Audio system

컄컄 왘 Press and hold button ‚ i Several sub-entries can be stored for each
or ƒ. main entry (name). These entries are marked by
a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the
The system jumps from one initial upper left-hand corner of the display. The
letter to the next in ascending or following abbreviations for sub-entries are possi-
descending order. ble:
왘 Press and hold button ‚ CEL = Mobile phone
or ƒ until desired initial letter HOM = Home
has been reached. WOR = Work 왘 Press MEM soft key or press
FAX = Fax button ‚ or ƒ.
or PAG = Pager
TEL = Main 왘 Press RCV soft key (received calls).
왘 Press button ‚ or ƒ
repeatedly until desired entry has 왘 When you have selected a number, The number of received calls and
been reached. press s button. then the call last received appear
briefly in the display.
The stored entries are selected in The call will be made.
alphabetical order with the 왘 Select desired telephone number
앫 Viewing the telephone number of a
sub-entries. with button ‚ or ƒ.
phone book entry
The letter R and the number of the
왘 Search for desired entry.
memory position appear in the
왘 Press NUM soft key. upper left-hand corner of the
The telephone number of the phone display. The numbers are stored in
book entry appears in the display. the order of the calls received.

앫 Returning calls received 왘 When you have selected a number,


press s button.
The call will be made.

216
Controls in detail
Audio system

앫 Speed dial Redial 왘 Select desired telephone number


with button ‚ or ƒ.
If you have stored telephone numbers If the number you have dialed is busy, you
as speed dial numbers in your can again place calls to the last ten The letter L and the number of the
telephone, you can also enter these telephone numbers dialed using the redial memory position appears in the
with buttons 1 to R on the radio function. left-hand corner of the display. The
unit. numbers are stored in the order of
i If you have activated the automatic redial the calls received.
왘 Press desired button 1 to R function on your mobile telephone, the number
briefly. of the person being called is automatically redi- 왘 When you have selected a number,
aled after a short waiting period if there is a busy press s button.
왘 Press s button. signal.
Refer to the separate operating instructions for The call will be made.
The call will be made.
the mobile telephone.
앫 Turbo dial Accepting an incoming call
앫 Manual redial
If you have stored telephone numbers If the telephone is active in the background
as turbo dial numbers in your (reception symbol is visible in the display),
telephone, you can also enter these the audio source is muted when an incom-
with buttons 1 to R on the radio ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
unit. heard and the caller’s telephone number,
왘 Press desired button 1 to R or the name under which the telephone
until the call is made. number has been saved in the telephone
book, appears in the display. If the caller’s
왘 Press s button. number is not relayed, CALL will appear in
The telephone number last dialed the display.
will appear in the display. 왘 Press s button.
The call is accepted.

217
Controls in detail
Audio system

Muting a call Accepting a second incoming call Placing a second call


It is possible to mute a call; the caller is If you receive another call during an If you wish to place another call during an
then no longer able to hear you. already active call, you can accept the already active call, you can place the
second call and switch between the two. second call and switch between the callers
앫 Mute on
or combine them into one call. Note that
앫 Accepting a second call
왘 Press MUT soft key. this feature is dependent on availability
왘 Place new call by entering from your mobile phone service provider.
왘 MIC MUTE will appear in the display.
telephone number manually.
앫 Mute off 앫 Placing a second call
i You will be notified of the second call acous- 왘 Place a new call by entering
왘 Press MUT soft key again. tically, but you will not see this in the display.
telephone number manually.
You are connected to the second
Terminating a call 왘 Press s button.
caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
왘 Press t button. You are connected to the second
앫 Switching between calls
The current call is terminated and the caller; the first caller is kept on
muted audio source becomes active 왘 Press s button. hold.
again. This switches between the calls. 앫 Terminating a call
The non-active call is kept on hold.
왘 Press t button.
앫 Terminating a call
The current call is terminated. The
왘 Press t button. connection to the caller previously
The current call is terminated. The kept on hold is also interrupted;
connection to the caller previously however, reconnection is indicated
kept on hold is also interrupted; by an acoustic signal.
however, reconnection is indicated
by an acoustic signal.

218
Controls in detail
Audio system

앫 Combining two calls Emergency calls “911” The following conditions must be met for a
“911” emergency call:
왘 Press s button.
The following describes how to dial a “911”
앫 Telephone must be switched on.
The calls are combined into one emergency call using the audio system
call. head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified 앫 The corresponding mobile communica-
mobile phone* is inserted in the phone tions network must be available.
앫 Terminating a combined call
cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the
왘 Press t button. descriptions refer to the audio system
i Emergency calls may not be possible with all
telephone networks or if certain network servic-
The connection to both callers is head unit. es and/or telephone functions are active. Check
terminated. Consult the separate telephone operating with your local service providers.
instructions that came with your mobile If you cannot make an emergency call, you
phone* for information on how to place a will have to initiate rescue measures
“911” emergency call on the mobile yourself.
phone*.
GSM network phones
Warning! G
Placing a “911” emergency call using
The “911” emergency call system is a public audio head unit with the phone locked
service. Using it without due cause is a crim- 왘 Press h button to switch to
inal offense. telephone operation.
PIN? appears in the audio display.
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on
the audio head unit. 컄컄

219
Controls in detail
Audio system

컄컄 왘 Press OK soft key or s button for i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, NO Placing a “911” emergency call using
dialing to begin. SERVICE appears in the audio display. In that audio head unit with the phone
case, you only can make an emergency call on unlocked
DIALING appears in the audio display the mobile phone itself, without the use of the
while the telephone establishes the head unit. 왘 Press h button to switch to
connection. telephone operation.
왘 Wait until the emergency call center TDMA/CDMA network phones 왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on
answers, then describe the emergency. the audio head unit.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone locked 왘 Press s button for dialing to begin.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone DIALING appears in the audio display
왘 Press h button to switch to
unlocked while the telephone establishes the
telephone operation.
connection.
왘 Press h button to switch to CODE? appears in the audio display.
telephone operation. 왘 Wait until the emergency call center
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on answers, then describe the emergency.
왘 Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit.
the audio head unit.
왘 Press OK soft key or s button for
왘 Press s button for dialing to begin. dialing to begin.
DIALING appears in the audio display DIALING appears in the audio display
while the telephone establishes the while the telephone establishes the
connection. connection.
왘 Wait until the emergency call center 왘 Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency. answers, then describe the emergency.

220
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
The side windows are opened and closed
When closing the power windows, make with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
electrically. The switches for all the side
sure there is no danger of anyone being children unattended in the vehicle, or with
windows are on the driver’s door. The
harmed by the closing procedure. access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
switches for the respective windows are
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
on the front passenger door and the rear The closing of the door windows can be im- result in an accident and/or serious
doors. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, personal injury.
if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch. i You can also open or close the power win-
dows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
If the window encounters an obstruction feature” (컄 page 223) and “Convenience clos-
that blocks its path in a circumstance where ing feature” (컄 page 223).
you pulled the switch past the resistance Depending on current position, the windows may
point and released it to close the window, also open or close when the air recirculation
the automatic reversal function will stop the button , in the control panel of the climate
window and open it slightly. control (컄 page 165) or automatic climate
control* (Canada only) (컄 page 175), or the
1 Left front window If the window encounters an obstruction charcoal filter button e in the control panel
2 Right front window that blocks its path in a circumstance where of the automatic climate control* (Canada only)
3 Right rear window you are closing the window by pulling and (컄 page 183) is pressed and held.
4 Left rear window holding the switch, by pressing and holding 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
5 Rear window override switch button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by press-
(컄 page 80) ing and holding button , or e on the
climate control panel, the automatic rever-
sal function will not operate.

221
Controls in detail
Power windows

Opening the windows Fully opening the windows


왘 Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
(Express-open) Warning! G
point. 왘 Press switch 1 to 4 past the Driver’s door only:
resistance point and release. If within 5 seconds you again pull the switch
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the The corresponding window opens past the resistance point and release, the
switch. completely. automatic reversal will not function.

Closing the windows Fully closing the windows Stopping windows


(Express-close)
왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance 왘 Press or pull respective switch again.
point. 왘 Pull switch 1 to 4 past the
The corresponding window will move resistance point and release. Synchronizing power windows
upwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window closes
completely. The power windows must be
resynchronized each time
Warning! G ! If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the win- 앫 after the battery has been
If you pull and hold the switch up when dow will stop and open slightly. disconnected or discharged.
closing the window, and upward movement Remove the obstruction, pull the switch again 앫 if the power windows cannot be fully
of the window is blocked by some obstruc- past the resistance point and release. opened (Express-open) or closed
tion including but not limited to arms, hands, If the window still does not close when there is (Express-close).
fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not no obstruction, then pull and hold the switch
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
operate. again. The side window will then close without
the obstruction sensor function.

222
Controls in detail
Power windows

왘 Pull the power window switches until 왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
앫 Release button ‹ to stop the closing
the side windows are closed. handle. The SmartKey must be in close procedure. To open, press and hold
proximity to the door handle. button Œ. To continue the closing
Hold the switches for approximately
1 second. 왘 Press and hold button Œ until the procedure after making sure that there
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* is no danger of anyone being harmed by
The power windows are synchronized. the closing procedure, press and hold
have reached the desired position.
button ‹.
Summer opening feature 왘 Release button Œ to interrupt pro-
cedure. 왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate handle. The SmartKey must be in close
the vehicle before driving off by simulta- Convenience closing feature proximity to the door handle.
neously:
왘 Press and hold button ‹ until the
앫 opening the side windows
Warning! G windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely closed.
When closing the windows and the tilt/slid- 왘 Release the ‹ button to stop
ing sunroof*, make sure that there is no procedure.
danger of anyone being harmed by the clos-
ing procedure. Make sure all windows and the tilt/sliding
sunroof* are properly closed before leav-
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- ing the vehicle.
lows:

223
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Opening and closing the power With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof screen can be slid into the roof opening to Warning! G
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and sunroof open, the screen will also retract. When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the sure there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel. The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any
direction.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
Screen
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.

Sunroof switch In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing


their seat belts or not wearing them properly
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
opening also presents a potential for injury
3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
for occupants wearing their seat belts
4 Push back to slide sunroof open
properly as entire body parts or portions of
them may protrude from the passenger
compartment.

224
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso- Opening and closing the power
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
nance noises may result in addition to the usual tilt/sliding sunroof
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave 왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the
sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
children unattended in the vehicle, or with reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po- tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side switch to resistance point in the
unsupervised access to a vehicle could window slightly. required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
result in an accident and/or serious
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding Release the sunroof switch when the
personal injury.
sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer open- tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
ing feature” (컄 page 223) and “Convenience desired position.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans- closing feature” (컄 page 223).
port any objects with sharp edges which can Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding Fully opening (Express-open) and
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. sunroof may also open or close when the air re- closing (Express-close) the power
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is circulation button , in the control panel of tilt/sliding sunroof
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in the climate control (컄 page 165) or automatic
malfunctions. climate control* (Canada only) (컄 page 181), or 왘 To open or close the tilt/sliding
the charcoal filter button e in the control sunroof, move the sunroof switch past
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
panel of the automatic climate control* (Canada the resistance point in the required
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
only) (컄 page 183) is pressed and held. direction of arrow 1 to 4 and
(컄 page 364).
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.

225
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
during Express-operation sunroof
왘 Move and hold the sunroof switch in di-
왘 Move the sunroof switch in any rection of arrow 1 (컄 page 224) until
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
direction. the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at
synchronized
the rear.
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is 앫 after the battery has been
blocked during the closing procedure, the Hold the sunroof switch for
disconnected or discharged
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly. approximately 1 second.
앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
왘 Check the Express-open feature
closed manually (컄 page 364)
(컄 page 225).
앫 after a malfunction
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open completely, the tilt/sliding sunroof is
smoothly synchronized. Otherwise repeat the
above steps.

226
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is
described on the following pages: Warning! G
앫 Cruise control, with which the vehicle The cruise control is a convenience system
can maintain a preset speed. designed to assist the driver during vehicle
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP®, operation. The driver is and must always re-
see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 82). main responsible for the vehicle’s speed and
for safe brake operation.
Cruise control Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control automatically maintains travel at a steady speed. 1 Sets current or higher speed
the speed you set for your vehicle. 2 Sets current or lower speed
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The use of cruise control is recommended ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic 3 Cancels cruise control
for driving at a constant speed for extend- because conditions do not allow safe 4 Resumes at last set speed
ed periods of time. You can set or resume driving at a steady speed.
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 앫 The use of cruise control can be danger- Setting current speed
(30 km/h). ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
The cruise control function is operated by tire traction can result in wheel spin and speed.
means of the cruise control lever. loss of control.
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving
The cruise control lever is the uppermost in fog.
control lever.
lever on the left-hand side of the steering The current speed is set.
column (컄 page 22). The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ- 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
ously set speed and wishes to resume this pedal.
particular preset speed.
Cruise control is activated.

227
Controls in detail
Driving systems

i On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control ! Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Setting a higher speed
may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once Moving the gear selector lever to position N
왘 Lift cruise control lever to position 1
the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. while driving also cancels cruise control. Howev-
er, the gear selector lever should not be moved and hold it up until the desired speed is
to position N while driving, except to coast when reached.
Canceling cruise control
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy 왘 Release cruise control lever.
There are several ways to cancel cruise roads).
control: The new speed is set.
i Vehicles with manual transmission: The set
왘 Step on the brake pedal. cruise controlled speed is switched off when de- i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
clutching exceeds 4 seconds during shifting a deactivate cruise control. After brief accelera-
Cruise control is canceled. The last tion (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume
new gear.
speed set is stored for later use. the last speed set.
or i The last stored speed is canceled when you
turn off the engine.
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.

228
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments “Resume” function)
왘 Depress cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
Faster
Warning! G
왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in
왘 Release cruise control lever.
direction of arrow 1. The speed stored in memory should only be
The new speed is set. set again if prevailing road conditions per-
Slower mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: differences arising from returning to preset
When you use the cruise control lever to deceler- 왘 Briefly tip cruise control lever in
ate, the transmission will automatically down- speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
direction of arrow 2.
shift if the engine’s braking power does not ous injury to you and others.
brake the vehicle sufficiently.
왘 Briefly push cruise control lever to
position 4.
The cruise control resumes the last set
speed.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.

229
Controls in detail
Loading

Roof rack* Ski sack* (Canada only)

Warning! G
Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation in-
structions. Otherwise, an improperly at-
tached roof rack system or its load could 왘 Mount the roof rack only between the
become detached from the vehicle. fastening points (see arrows).
1 Handle
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 왘 Secure the roof rack according to 2 Cover
220 lbs (100 kg). manufacturer’s instructions for 3 Armrest
Take into consideration that when the roof
installation.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics Unfolding and loading
are different from those when operating the 왘 Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
! Load the roof rack in such a way that the ve- you could otherwise damage it.
hicle cannot be damaged while driving.
왘 Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2
Make sure
down.
앫 you can fully raise the tilt/sliding sunroof*.
앫 you can fully open the trunk.

230
Controls in detail
Loading

4 Hook and loop fastener 5 Button 왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
왘 Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4. 왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Pull ski sack into passenger compart- 왘 Press button 5. Warning! G
ment and unfold. The flap opens downward. The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants. 컄컄

231
Controls in detail
Loading

컄컄 Unloading and folding


왘 Loosen the straps.
왘 Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
왘 Unload skis.
왘 Close flap in trunk.
왘 Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
왘 Place folded ski sack inside recess of
backrest.
6 Strap 7 Hook
8 Eye 왘 Fasten hook and loop fastener.
왘 Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack 왘 Connect hook 7 to eye 8. 왘 Close ski sack compartment cover.
are tightly secured.
Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).

232
Controls in detail
Loading

Removing the ski sack Split rear bench seat*


You can remove the ski sack for cleaning
Warning! G
To expand the cargo area, you can fold
or drying. Never drive vehicle with trunk open while down the left and right rear seat backrests.
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
The two sections can be folded down
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
separately.
terior, resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
Warning! G
i To prevent unauthorized persons from ac- When expanding the luggage area, always
cessing the trunk, always close the flap.
fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Installing the ski sack Unless you are transporting cargo, the
backrests must remain properly locked in
1 Button Install the ski sack in the reverse order.
the upright position.
2 Ski sack frame
왘 Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
3 Flap In an accident, during hard braking or
inward until the ski sack frame snaps sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
왘 Open trunk lid. into place. thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause
왘 Press button 1. 왘 Close flap 3. injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
The flap 3 opens downward. 왘 Close trunk lid.
Always use the cargo tie down rings*
왘 Press button 1 firmly until ski sack
(컄 page 236).
frame 2 is released.
왘 Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
out.

233
Controls in detail
Loading

Folding the backrest forward Returning the backrest to original


position
The release handle 1 is located in the
trunk.

왘 Pull release handle 2.


왘 Fold seat cushion 3 forward.
왘 Fold backrest 2 rearward until it
왘 Fold backrest 4 forward. engages.
왘 Pull release handle 1.
왘 Fully retract and fold rearward head ! Always release the seat cushion and fold it 왘 Fold seat cushion 1 rearward until it
forward before folding the seat backrests for- locks into position.
restraints (컄 page 103). ward. Otherwise, the backrest covering may be
damaged.

234
Controls in detail
Loading

Loading instructions
Warning! G
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, cargo is
being carried in the trunk, or the extended
cargo compartment is not in use. Check for
If the backrest is not locked into position, secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
a red indicator 3 will be visible. backrest.
The total load weight including vehicle
왘 Check for secure locking by pushing In an accident, during hard braking or sud- occupants and luggage/cargo should not
and pulling on the backrest. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown exceed the load limit indicated on the cor-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury responding placard located on the driver’s
to vehicle occupants unless the items are door B-pillar.
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
To help avoid personal injury during a ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care tribution. It is therefore recommended to
when transporting cargo. load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
i To prevent unauthorized persons from ac- placed towards the front of the vehicle.
cess to the trunk, always lock backrest in its up-
right position.

235
Controls in detail
Loading

Always place items being carried against Cargo tie-down rings*


To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
them as securely as possible. The four cargo tie-down rings are located
when transporting cargo.
in the trunk.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al- Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
ways be kept as low as possible since it in- carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
fluences the handling characteristics of hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
the vehicle. and death.

Warning! G i The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-


jects.
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
The enlarged cargo area should only be used for
ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and items which do not fit in the trunk alone.
fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load. Cargo tie-down rings
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- 왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown even load on all rings with rope
around inside the vehicle and can cause in- sufficient strength to hold down the
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items cargo.
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 235).

236
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box

Warning! G
Do not store any flammable substances in-
side the vehicle or in the trunk. Otherwise
the flammable substances could ignite and
start a fire inside the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care 1 Unlocking
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug- 1 Glove box lid release 2 Locking
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not 2 Glove box lid
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat Locking glove box
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf Opening glove box
왘 Insert mechanical key (컄 page 361)
below the rear window. 왘 Pull glove box lid release 1. into the glove box lock and turn it to
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy position 2.
The glove box lid 2 opens downward.
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help Unlocking glove box
Closing glove box
to prevent stored objects from being thrown 왘 Turn mechanical key in the glove box
왘 Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
about and injuring vehicle occupants during lock to position 1.
an accident. i Audio system/COMAND* with CD chang-
er*: The CD changer* is located in the glove box.

237
Controls in detail
Useful features

Storage compartment/telephone* tray Closing storage compartment Armrest in the rear passenger
under front center armrest compartment
왘 Press armrest down until it engages
A flat storage tray with a deeper storage into place.
compartment underneath is located below
the front center armrest. Both can be Opening the storage tray/telephone*
opened separately. tray
왘 Press button 3 on driver’s side or
button 2 on passenger side and lift
armrest.

Closing the storage tray/telephone*


tray 왘 Pull the top of the armrest out and fold
왘 Press armrest down until it engages it down.
into place. ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
i The mobile phone cradle (컄 page 245), the you could otherwise damage it.
1 Handle to open storage compartment Roadside Assistance button • (컄 page 250)
2 Button to open storage tray/tele- and the Information button ¡ (컄 page 251)
phone* tray, passenger side are located in the storage tray (if equipped).
3 Button to open storage tray/tele-
phone* tray, driver’s side

Opening storage compartment


왘 Pull handle 1 and lift armrest.

238
Controls in detail
Useful features

Parcel net in front passenger footwell Cup holders


Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
(all models, except C 280 4MATIC and
holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
C 350 4MATIC)
A small convenience parcel net is located
Warning! G cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
in the front passenger footwell. It is for Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
small and light items, such as road maps, or may cause an accident and/or serious
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
mail, etc. personal injury.
ment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
Warning! G do not fill containers to a height where the Cup holders in front of seat armrest
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill Underneath the swiveling cup holder is
The parcel net is intended for storing during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an ac- another stationary cup holder. You can
light-weight items only. cident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants only use this when the swiveling cup holder
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or may cause serious personal injury. Liquids is pulled out and completely turned
fragile objects may not be transported in the spilled on vehicle equipment may cause outward.
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak- damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be Limited Warranty.
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause When not in use, keep the cup holder
injury to vehicle occupants. closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
The parcel net cannot protect transported to you or others when contacted during
goods in the event of an accident. braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.

239
Controls in detail
Useful features

Sliding out swiveling cup holder Turning swiveling cup holder outward Turning swiveling cup holder inward and
sliding it in

왘 Push button 1. 왘 Turn the cup holder in direction of


arrow 2 until it engages. 왘 Turn the cup holder in direction of
The cup holder slides upward.
You can now use both cup holders. arrow 3 until it engages.
! No objects should be in the swiveling cup 왘 Press the cup holder in direction of
holder when the swiveling cup holder is slid up-
ward. Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or the arrow 4 until it engages.
objects could be damaged.
! No objects should be in the stationary cup
holder when the swiveling cup holder is turned
inward and pushed in. Otherwise the swiveling
cup holder or the objects could be damaged.

240
Controls in detail
Useful features

Cup holder in rear seat armrest Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert

Center console ashtray Warning! G


Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to
secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position N (manual trans-
mission: second gear). With gear selector
lever in position N (manual transmission:
second gear) turn off the engine.
1 Cup holder
왘 Secure vehicle from movement by
Opening cup holder
1 Cover plate setting the parking brake.
왘 Briefly press the front of cup holder 1. 2 Sliding button
왘 Move the gear selector lever to
The cup holder slides out slightly. 3 Ashtray insert
position N (manual transmission:
왘 Briefly press the bottom of cover second gear).
왘 Pull out the cup holder until it stops.
plate 1.
Now you have more room to take out
Closing cup holder The cover plate opens automatically. the ashtray insert.
왘 Slide cup holder back until it engages. 왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight The ashtray insert 3 slides out
against the armrest when it is folded down, as slightly.
you could otherwise damage it.
왘 Remove the ashtray insert.

241
Controls in detail
Useful features

Reinstalling ashtray insert Removing ashtray insert Cigarette lighter


왘 Push the ashtray insert 3 down into 왘 Push button 1 to disengage ashtray
insert 2 and remove it.
the retainer until it engages.
Warning! G
왘 Push down cover plate 1 to close
Reinstalling ashtray insert
ashtray. Never touch the heating element or sides of
왘 Push the ashtray insert 2 down into the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
The cover plate engages.
the retainer until it engages. knob only.
Rear seat ashtray 왘 Push at top of cover 3 to close Make sure that any children traveling with
ashtray. you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Button
2 Ashtray insert
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
3 Cover
왘 Pull at top of cover 3.

242
Controls in detail
Useful features

! The lighter socket can be used to accommo- Power outlet


date 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a max-
imum of 85 W) designed for use with the The power outlet is located in the rear pas-
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in senger compartment.
mind, however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive con-
necting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do
not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket.
With the socket damaged, the lighter may no
longer be able to be placed in the heating
(pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out
1 Cover plate too early with the lighter not hot enough.
2 Cigarette lighter To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec-
왘 Briefly press the bottom of cover trical accessories designed for use with the stan-
plate 1. dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
1 Power outlet
power outlets (컄 page 243) in your vehicle
The cover plate opens automatically. whenever possible. 2 Cover
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 2. 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
왘 Push down cover plate 1 to close
The cigarette lighter will pop out ashtray. 왘 Pull at top of cover 2.
automatically when hot.
The cover plate engages. 왘 Flip cover 1 to the left and insert
electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
i The power outlet can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
of 180 W.

243
Controls in detail
Useful features

Telephone* i Various mobile phone cradles can be in-


Warning! G stalled in the front center armrest, see separate
installation instructions for the mobile phone
Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re- cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be ter.
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For The functions and services available to you while
out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec- using the mobile phone depend on your service
from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location provider and the type of mobile phone you are
using. See also separate operating manual for in-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
structions on how to use your mobile phone.
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious When the mobile phone is inserted in the
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
personal injury. cradle, you can operate the telephone us-
driving, please use the hands-free device
ing the following devices:
and only use the telephone when road,
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some 앫 mobile phone keypad
phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
앫 COMAND* (see separate operating in-
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
structions)
nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND*1 if road, weath-
the outside of the vehicle. 앫 buttons s and t on the multi-
er and traffic conditions permit.
function steering wheel (컄 page 122)
The external antenna must be approved by Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- 앫 audio system (컄 page 208)
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa- covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
tion on the installation of an approved ly 14 m) every second.
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
1
mitter operation instructions regarding use Observe all legal requirements.
of an external antenna.

244
Controls in detail
Useful features

Please note that these functions are only 왘 If applicable, remove the cover for the 왘 Push the top of the mobile phone in di-
available with Mercedes-Benz approved external antenna connection from the rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the
mobile phones. Please contact an back of the mobile phone and store it in mobile phone release button engages.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for in- a safe place. Be sure to comply with the
The mobile phone is connected to the
formation on features available for your mobile phone’s operating instructions
network via the external antenna.
mobile phone of choice. as well.
The mobile phone is linked to the
The cradle is located in the front center
hands-free device and the multifunc-
armrest.
tion steering wheel.
왘 Open telephone tray (컄 page 238). The battery is charged depending on its
charge status and the position of the
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone SmartKey in the starter switch. The
cradle charge procedure will be indicated in
Once the mobile phone has been inserted the mobile phone’s display.
in the mobile phone cradle, you have to You can place or receive phone calls. You
use the hands-free device to respond dur- can control other functions of the mobile
ing phone calls. Example illustration
phone via the control system
1 Insert the mobile phone (컄 page 146), audio system (컄 page 208),
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the 2 Connector contact COMAND* (see separate operating
mobile phone cradle. 3 Mobile phone cradle instructions).
왘 Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
into connector contact 2 on
i When you take the SmartKey out of the
starter switch, the mobile phone remains
cradle 3. switched on for approx. 10 minutes. If you place
or receive a call during this time, the mobile
phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has
been completed.

245
Controls in detail
Useful features

Removing mobile phone from mobile Changing mobile phone cradle Installing a different mobile phone cra-
phone cradle If you require a different cradle for your dle
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
before installing a new one.

Removing an existing mobile phone cra-


dle

Example illustration Example illustration


1 Release catch for mobile phone 1 Contact plate
2 Mobile phone cradle 2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a 왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis- Example illustration recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
connected. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
왘 Press release catch in direction of 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
until it engages.
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of 3 Mobile phone cradle
mobile phone cradle 2. 왘 Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.

246
Controls in detail
Useful features

Tele Aid* The Tele Aid system system or COMAND* System control
counterclockwise or press button ç on
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system Demand)
the multifunction steering wheel.
may only be performed by completing the sub-
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance The Tele Aid system consists of three
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete Roadside Assistance button • or
types of response:
either of these steps will result in a system that the Information button ¡, depend-
is not activated. 앫 automatic and manual emergency ing on the type of response required.
If you have any questions regarding activation, 앫 roadside assistance
please call the Response Center at
i The SOS button is located in the overhead
앫 information control panel (컄 page 249).
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The Roadside Assistance button • and the
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
Information button ¡ are located in the arm-
Shortly after the completion of your Tele ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, rest storage compartment (컄 page 238).
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a properly connected, not damaged and cel-
user ID and password. By visiting lular and GPS coverage is available. ! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular net-
work for communication and the GPS (Global Po-
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can sitioning System) satellites for vehicle location.
(USA only), you will have access to account be adjusted when using the volume control If either of these signals are unavailable, the
information, remote door unlock and on the audio system or COMAND* System Tele Aid system may not function and if this oc-
more. or on the multifunction steering wheel. To curs, assistance must be summoned by other
raise, turn the rotary volume control on au- means.
dio system or COMAND* System clock-
wise or press button æ on the
multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
turn the rotary volume control on audio

247
Controls in detail
Useful features

i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the than 10 seconds or do not come on). The Emergency calls
audio system or COMAND* System unit is muted message malfunction Visit workshop
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) paus- appears in the multifunction display.
es. The optional cellular phone (if installed) and ly following an accident in which the emer-
inserted in cradle switches off. If you must use gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
this phone, we recommend that you use it only Warning! G air bags deploy.
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
An emergency call can also be initiated
Remove the phone from the cradle and place the If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
call. The navigation* system (if engaged) will manually by opening the cover next to the
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
continue to run. The multifunction display in the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
the Information button remain illuminated
instrument cluster is available for use, and spo- briefly pressing the button located under
continuously in red and/or the message
ken commands are only available by pressing the the cover. See (컄 page 249) for
RPT button on audio system or COMAND* Sys- malfunction Visit workshop is
instructions on initiating an emergency call
tem unit. A pop-up window will appear in the au- displayed in the multifunction display after
manually.
dio system or COMAND* System unit display to the system self-check, a malfunction in the
indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. After system has been detected. Once the emergency call is in progress, the
the TeleAid call has ended, the optional cellular indicator lamp on the SOS button will
phone switches on again. A PIN entry might be If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
begin to flash. The message
necessary. above, the system may not operate as
Connecting Call appears in the multifunc-
expected. Have the system checked at the
tion display. When the connection is estab-
System self-check nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
lished, the message Call connected
possible.
Initially, after switching on ignition, mal- appears in the multifunction display. All in-
functions are detected and indicated (the formation relevant to the emergency, such
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the as the location of the vehicle (determined
Roadside Assistance button • and the by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-
Information button ¡ stay on longer cle model, identification number and color
are generated.

248
Controls in detail
Useful features

A voice connection between the Response Initiating an emergency call manually


Center and the occupants of the vehicle Warning! G
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated. If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
The Response Center will attempt to flashing continuously and there was no
determine more precisely the nature of the voice connection to the Response Center
accident provided they can speak to an established, then the Tele Aid system could
occupant of the vehicle. not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available).
The Tele Aid system is available if The message Call failed appears in the
앫 it has been activated and is operation- multifunction display for approximately
al. Activation requires a subscription 10 seconds.
for monitoring services, connection Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
and cellular air time moned by other means.
앫 the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response cen- 1 Cover
ter 2 SOS button
왘 Briefly press on cover 1.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos-
sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from The cover will open.
the GPS satellite network and pass the informa-
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
tion on to the Response Center.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded. 컄컄

249
Controls in detail
Useful features

컄컄 왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Roadside Assistance button • i While the call is connected you can change
Response Center. The Roadside Assistance button • is to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button
on the audio system or COMAND* System unit.
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency located below the center armrest cover.
call is concluded. A voice connection between the Roadside
왘 Open the storage compartment under
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
the center armrest (컄 page 238).
of the vehicle will be established.
Warning! G 왘 Press and hold button (for longer than
왘 Describe the nature of the need for
2 seconds).
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the assistance.
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
do not wait for voice contact after you have The button will flash while the call is in
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
pressed the emergency button. Carefully progress. The message
tow your vehicle to the nearest
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- Connecting call will appear in the
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
tion. The Response Center will automatically multifunction display.
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
contact local emergency officials with the When the connection is established, the ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man-
vehicle’s approximate location if they re- message Call connected appears in the ual for more information.
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- These programs are only available in the
will transmit data generating the vehicle
pants. USA:
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such
and GPS signals). as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.

250
Controls in detail
Useful features

i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Information button ¡ A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance button • remains illuminated in Assistance Center representative and the
The Information button ¡ is located
red for approximately 10 seconds during the sys- occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
tem self-check after switching on the ignition (to- below the center armrest cover.
lished. Information regarding the operation
gether with the SOS button and the Information 왘 Open the storage compartment under of your vehicle, the nearest
button ¡). the center armrest (컄 page 238). Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
See system self-check (컄 page 248) if the indi- USA products and services is available to
왘 Press and hold button (for longer than
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
2 seconds). you.
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance A call to the Customer Assistance For more details concerning the Tele Aid
button • is flashing continuously and there Center will be initiated. The button will system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
was no voice connection to the Response Center flash while the call is in progress. The use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
established, then the Tele Aid system could not message Connecting call will appear arately) to learn more (USA only).
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network was not available).
in the multifunction display. i The indicator lamp in the Information
The message Call failed appears in the mul- When the connection is established, the button ¡ remains illuminated in red for ap-
tifunction display. message Call connected appears in the proximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth-
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- multifunction display. The Tele Aid system er with the SOS button and the Roadside
ing the t button on the multifunction steer- will transmit data generating the vehicle Assistance button •).
ing wheel or the END Button on the audio system identification number, model, color and lo-
or COMAND* System. See system self-check (컄 page 248) if the indi-
cation (subject to availability of cellular cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
and GPS signals). longer than approximately 10 seconds.
i While the call is connected, you can change
to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button
on the audio system or COMAND* System.

251
Controls in detail
Useful features

If the indicator lamp in the Information Call priority Remote door unlock
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center If other service calls such as a Roadside In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
established, then the Tele Aid system could not Assistance call or Information call are tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel- active, an Emergency call is still possible. and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
lular phone network is not available). The mes- In this case, the Emergency call will take
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
sage Call failed appears in the multifunction priority and override all other active calls.
display. Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
i The indicator lamp in the respective button or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Information calls can be terminated using
the t button on the multifunction steering flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
You will be asked to provide your pass-
wheel or the END Button on the audio system or calls can only be terminated by a Response Cen-
ter or Customer Assistance Center representa- word which you provided when you
COMAND* System. completed the subscriber agreement.
tive, whereas Roadside Assistance and
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing Information calls can also be terminated by 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu- pressing button t on the multifunction steer-
minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
ing wheel or using the END button on the audio
has detected a malfunction or the service is not system or COMAND* System. of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit flashing.
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or The message Connecting call
the system checked or contact the Response the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or appears in the multifunction display.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possi- 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
ble. Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
cle via Internet using the ID and password
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Ser-
vice at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.

252
Controls in detail
Useful features

i The remote door unlock feature is available Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener*
if the relevant cellular phone network is avail-
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
able. The integrated remote control is capable of
The SOS button will flash and the message 왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
Connecting call will appear in the multifunc- The police will issue a numbered devices. It provides a convenient way to re-
tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
incident report. place up to three hand-held remote con-
command. trols used to operate devices such as
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center 왘 Pass this number on to the garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-
specialist may attempt to establish voice contact Mercedes-Benz Response Center along er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
with the vehicle occupants. with your password issued to you when some other systems.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for you subscribed to the service.
Before the integrated remote control can
more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho- The Response Center will then attempt
rization was received by the Response Center, be used, it must be programmed to the ga-
to covertly contact the vehicle’s rage door opener, gate operator or other
you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail-
gate recessed handle again. Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is device you wish to operate. See the follow-
located, the Response Center will ing instructions for programming informa-
contact the local law enforcement and tion.
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
i When the anti-theft alarm* stays on for
more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated auto-
matically to the Response Center. See
“Anti-theft alarm system*” (컄 page 89).

253
Controls in detail
Useful features

Warning! G When programming a garage door opener,


park outside the garage.
Before programming the integrated remote Do not run the engine while programming
control to a garage door opener or gate the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
operator, make sure people and objects are exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
out of the way of the device to prevent po- exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
tential harm or damage. When programming (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious-
a garage door opener, the door moves up or ness and possible death.
down. When programming a gate operator,
Interior rear view mirror with integrated re- the gate opens or closes. Programming the integrated remote
mote control control
Do not use the integrated remote control
1 Indicator lamp with any garage door opener that lacks Step 1:
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
Needed for programming (not part of vehi- includes any garage door opener model Step 2:
cle equipment): manufactured before April 1, 1982).
왘 If you have previously programmed a
5 Hand-held remote control of ga- A garage door that cannot detect an object
signal transmitter button and wish to
rage door opener, gate operator - signaling the door to stop and reverse -
retain its programming, proceed to
or other device does not meet current U.S. federal safety
step 3.
standards.
6 Hand-held remote control but-
If you are programming the integrated
ton
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when indicator lamp 1 be-

254
Controls in detail
Useful features

gins to flash after approximately mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not If indicator lamp 1 stays on
20 seconds (do not hold the button for release the buttons until step 5 is com- constantly, programming is complete
longer than 30 seconds). This proce- pleted. and your device should activate when
dure erases any previous settings for Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
the respective signal transmitter
all three channels and initializes the button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-
and then rapidly.
memory. leased.
If you later wish to program a second i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is pro- i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
and/or third hand-held transmitter to grammed. If this button has already been pro- 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the remaining two signal transmitter grammed, the indicator lamp will only start continue with programming steps 8 through 12
buttons, do not repeat this step and be- flashing after 20 seconds. as your garage door opener may be equipped
gin directly with step 3. with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 5:
Step 3: Step 7:
왘 After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
왘 To program the remaining two signal
왘 Hold the end of hand-held remote slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
control 5 of the device you wish to transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
the hand-held remote control button
train approximately 2 to 5 in above starting with step 3.
and the signal transmitter button.
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans-
Step 6: Rolling code programming
mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro-
grammed, while keeping indicator 왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal To train a garage door opener (or other
lamp 1 in view. transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and rolling code devices) with the rolling code
observe indicator lamp 1. feature, follow these instructions after
Step 4:
completing the “Programming” portion
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
press hand-held remote control person may make the following training
button 6 and the desired signal trans- procedures quicker and easier.)

255
Controls in detail
Useful features

Step 8: Step 11: Gate operator/Canadian programming


왘 Locate “training” button on the garage 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release Canadian radio-frequency laws require
door opener motor head unit. same signal transmitter button a sec- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
ond time to complete the training after several seconds of transmission
Exact location and color of the button
process. which may not be long enough for the
may vary by garage door opener brand.
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
Depending on manufacturer, the i Some garage door openers (or other rolling signal during programming. Similar to this
“training” button may also be referred code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there
signal transmitter button a third time to com- are designed to “time-out” in the same
is difficulty locating the transmitting
plete the training process. manner.
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operator’s Manual. Step 12: If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
Step 9: 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
(regardless of where you live) by using the
왘 Press the “training” button on the ga- pressing the programmed signal trans-
programming procedures, replace step 4
rage door opener motor head unit. mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
with the following:
The “training light” is activated. Step 13:
Step 4:
왘 To program the remaining two signal
You have 30 seconds to initiate the 왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter
following step. transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
above starting with step 3.
Step 10: this button until it has been successful-
ly trained.
왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- 왘 While still holding down the signal
grammed signal transmitter button transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
(2, 3 or 4). “cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold

256
Controls in detail
Useful features

button 6 for 2 seconds, then release Reprogramming a single signal trans- Operation of integrated remote control
it for 2 seconds, and again press and mitter button
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- To program a device using a signal trans-
quence on the hand-held remote con- 왘 Select and press the appropriate
mitter button previously trained, follow
trol until the frequency signal has been integrated signal transmitter button
these steps:
learned. Upon successful training, indi- (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32). controlled device.
rapidly after several seconds. 왘 Press and hold the desired signal The integrated remote control trans-
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). mitter continues to send the signal as
step 6 to complete. Do not release the button. long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af-
i Upon completion of programming the inte-
grated remote control, make sure you retain the ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
Erasing the integrated remote control
hand-held remote control that came with the ga- signal transmitter button, proceed with
rage door opener, gate operator or other device. memory
programming starting with step 3.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 32).
ture programming of an integrated remote con-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held 왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer
remote control to operate the respective device signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
in other situations. for approximately 20 seconds, until
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.

257
Controls in detail
Useful features

Programming tips 앫 If another hand-held remote control is i USA only:


available for the same device, try the This device complies with Part 15 of the
If you are having difficulty programming
programming steps again using that FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
the integrated remote control, here are two conditions:
other hand-held remote control. Make
some helpful tips:
sure new batteries are in the hand-held (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
앫 Check the frequency of hand-held re- remote control before beginning the ence, and
mote control 5 (typically located on procedure. (2) this device must accept any interference re-
the reverse side of the remote). The in- ceived, including interference that may
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the
tegrated remote control is compatible cause undesired operation.
garage door opener assembly. This
with radio-frequency devices operating Any unauthorized modification to this device
may help improve transmitting and/or
between 280-390 MHz. could void the user’s authority to operate the
receiving signals. equipment.
앫 Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likeli- i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only:
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
hood of the hand-held remote control This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
you should experience further difficulties with Canada. Operation is subject to the following
sending a faster and more accurate sig- programming the integrated remote control,
nal to the integrated remote control. two conditions:
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance (1) This device may not cause interference, and
앫 While performing step 3, hold
Center (in the USA only) at (2) this device must accept any interference re-
hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in ceived, including interference that may
ent lengths and angles from the signal Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. cause undesired operation of the device.
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying an- Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
equipment.
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.

258
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

259
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on. All of the above instructions, as may apply
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first to your vehicle type, also apply when
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. after the engine or the rear differential has
been replaced.
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive i Always obey applicable speed limits.
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄 page 157) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).

260
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent,


depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G Warning! G
conditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- structing the pedals’ range of movement.
앫 Keep tires at the recommended tire tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
inflation pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgment. the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
The possibility of a serious or even fatal have sufficient clearance.
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
accident are greatly increased when you During sudden driving or braking maneu-
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low drink or take drugs and drive. vers, the objects could get caught between
load use. or beneath the pedals. You could then no
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
eration. taking drugs. to accidents and injury.

앫 Have all maintenance work performed


at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the maintenance service display.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.

261
Operation
Driving instructions

Power assistance Brakes ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:


Because the ESP® operates automatically, the
engine must be turned off (SmartKey in starter
Warning! G Warning! G switch position 0 or 1) when
앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake
With the engine not running, there is no After driving in heavy rain for some time test dynamometer
power assistance for the brake and steering without applying the brakes or through wa- 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
systems. In this case, it is important to keep ter deep enough to wet brake components, raised
in mind that a considerably higher degree of the first braking action may be somewhat Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
effort is necessary to brake and steer the reduced and increased pedal pressure may erwise seriously damage the brake system.
vehicle. be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
in front. with the ESP® ” (컄 page 88).
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
cause excessive and premature wear of the driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
brake pads. salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
It can also result in the brakes overheating, vehicle with considerable force prior to
thereby significantly reducing their effec- parking. The heat generated serves to dry
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the the brakes.
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- If your brake system is normally only
dent. subject to moderate loads, you should
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.

262
Operation
Driving instructions

All checks and service work on the brake Driving off


Warning! G system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
Make sure not to endanger any other road Mercedes-Benz Center. driving off. Perform this procedure only
users when carrying out these braking ma- when the road is clear of other traffic.
neuvers. Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist operating temperature has been reached.
System (BAS) (컄 page 84). Warning! G
! When starting off on a slippery surface, do
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may If other than recommended brake pads are not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
be the reason for low brake fluid level in installed, or other than recommended brake period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
the reservoir. fluid is used, the braking properties of the cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
Warranty.
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the safe braking is substantially impaired. This
instrument cluster comes on and an could result in an accident. ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
acoustic warning sounds although the pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
parking brake is released (컄 page 324). performance and causes premature brake and
! When driving down long and steep grades, drivetrain wear.
Observe additional messages in the multi- relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
function display that may appear lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
(컄 page 344). This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
Mercedes-Benz Center. on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.

263
Operation
Driving instructions

Parking Tires
앫 Automatic transmission*: Move the
gear selector lever to position P.

Warning! G 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. Warning! G


앫 When parked on an incline, always turn
Do not park this vehicle in areas where the front wheels towards the road curb. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
combustible materials such as grass, hay or 앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
leaves can come into contact with the hot to position 0 and remove. ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
exhaust system, as these materials could be 앫 Take the SmartKey with you and lock you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire. the vehicle when leaving. ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or tion to an area which is a safe distance from
damage to the vehicle or the vehicle the road.
drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
always do the following before turning off for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
the engine and leaving the vehicle: appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
앫 Manual transmission: Move the gear-
shift lever to neutral position (no gear
selected). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
앫 Manual transmission: Move the gear-
become visible at a tread depth of
shift lever into first or reverse gear.
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.

264
Operation
Driving instructions

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid Tire traction


band across the tread. Warning! G
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
Warning! G the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
You should pay particular attention to the
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Although the applicable federal motor condition of the road whenever the outside
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be temperatures are close to the freezing
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) point.
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
For more information, see “Tires and Warning! G
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), wheels” (컄 page 281).
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
the adhesion properties on a wet road are will be substantially reduced. Under such
sharply reduced. Hydroplaning
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
Depending upon the weather and/or road Depending on the depth of the water layer with extreme caution.
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
widely. at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
Specified tire inflation pressures must be road and apply brakes cautiously in the
maintained. This applies particularly if the rain.
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).

265
Operation
Driving instructions

Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
(컄 page 308) with a minimum tread depth may have a tire speed rating above the
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local maximum speed permitted by the
wheels for the winter season to ensure speed limits should be obeyed. Use electronic speed limiter.
normal balanced handling characteristics. prudent driving speeds appropriate to
Make sure your tires have the required tire
On packed snow, they can reduce your prevailing conditions.
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
stopping distance compared to summer the "Technical data" section (컄 page 403),
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still Warning! G for example when purchasing new tires.
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap- For Information on how to identify the tire
Even when permitted by law, never operate
propriate caution. speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
size designation, load and speed rating”
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may mum speed rating of the tires.
(컄 page 295).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is Exceeding the maximum speed for which
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- tires are rated can lead to sudden tire If you are uncertain about the correct read-
ranty. ing of the information given on a tire’s side-
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or wall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
personal injury and possible death, for you Center will be glad to assist you.
and for others. i For information on speed rating for winter
tires, see “Winter tires” (컄 page 308).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your For additional general information on tire speed
vehicle from exceeding a speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
of 130 mph (210 km/h). (컄 page 297).

266
Operation
Driving instructions

Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely


affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
The most important rule for slippery or icy force may become necessary to produce
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid the normal braking effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
Depressing the brake pedal periodically and from around the vehicle with the engine
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
when traveling at length on salt-strewn running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
system under such conditions.
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, efficiency back to normal. sulting in unconsciousness and death.
move gear selector lever to position N or in
If the vehicle is parked after being driven To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
case of manual transmission declutch.
on salt-treated roads, the braking open a window slightly on the side of the
Try to keep the vehicle under control by
efficiency should be tested as soon as vehicle not facing the wind.
corrective steering action.
possible after driving is resumed.
i For information on driving with snow chains,
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 309).
Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road The outside temperature indicator is not
users when carrying out these braking designed to serve as an ice-warning device
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift maneuvers. and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
in order to obtain braking action. This could Indicated temperatures just above the
result in drive wheel slip and reduced freezing point do not guarantee that the
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not road surface is free of ice.
prevent this type of control loss.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 308).

267
Operation
Driving instructions

Standing water Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio


transmitters
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water, Warning! G COMAND*, radio and telephone*
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force wa- Always fasten items being carried as
ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
securely as possible. Warning! G
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
If you must drive through standing water, drive Please do not forget that your primary
slowly to prevent water from entering the pas- den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
senger compartment or the engine compart-
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
ment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine securely fastened in the vehicle. Management and Data System), radio or
or transmission, or could result in water being in- telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
gested by the engine through the air intake caus- The trunk is the preferred place to carry conditions permit.
ing severe internal engine damage. Any such objects.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Driving abroad covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Abroad, there is an extensive
1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements.
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

268
Operation
Driving instructions

Telephones* and two-way radios Catalytic converter


Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
Warning! G monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
important element in conjunction with the operate this vehicle in areas where combus-
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial tible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
control of the pollutants in the exhaust can come into contact with the hot exhaust
out being connected to an external antenna)
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
operating condition by following our and cause a vehicle fire.
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
recommended maintenance instructions
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
possibly resulting in an accident and
personal injury. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic
converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline
in this vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces-
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-
connected to an antenna that is installed verter, causing it to overheat and potentially
on the outside of the vehicle. start a fire.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.

269
Operation
Driving instructions

Emission control The engine should not be operated with


Warning! G the coolant temperature over 248°F
Certain systems of the engine serve to (120°C). Doing so may cause serious
keep the toxic components of the exhaust Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to engine damage which is not covered by the
gases within permissible limits required by your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
law. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
These systems, of course, will function Warning! G
properly only when maintained strictly Do not run the engine in confined areas
according to factory specifications. Any (such as a garage) which are not properly 앫 Driving when your engine is badly
adjustments on the engine should, ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas overheated can cause some fluids,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, which may have leaked into the engine
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni- have the cause determined and corrected compartment, to catch fire. You could
cians. Engine adjustments should not be immediately. If you must drive under these be seriously burned.
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified conditions, drive only with at least one 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
service jobs must be carried out regularly window fully open at all times. cause serious burns and can occur just
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing by opening the hood. Stay away from
requirements. For details refer to the the engine if you see or hear steam com-
Coolant temperature
Maintenance Booklet. ing from it.
During severe operating conditions and Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant and do not stand near the vehicle until the
temperature may rise close to engine has cooled down.
approximately 248°F (120°C).

270
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling The fuel filler flap is located on the
Warning! G right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
Warning! G C 230/C 230 Sport: the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks
Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on
It burns violently and can cause serious per- fuel filler flap): i In case that the central locking system does
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly not release the fuel filler flap, or the opening
sonal injury.
mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assis-
flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha-
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- tance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited
rials near gasoline!
or if you come into contact with it or inhale
Turn off the engine before refueling fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanol
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- fumes and skin contact with ethanol. Extin-
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, guish all open flames before refueling. Never
extinguish all smoking materials. smoke or create sparks close to ethanol.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors can damage to your
health.

1 To open the fuel filler flap


2 To insert the fuel filler cap
3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure in-
formation

271
Operation
At the gas station

i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a 왘 Turn the engine off by turning the
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average SmartKey to position 0. Warning! G
of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
switch. pressure in the system which could cause a
C 230/C 230 Sport:
Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on the the point indicated by arrow 1. spray back out when removing the fuel
fuel filler flap. pump nozzle, which could cause personal
The fuel filler flap springs open.
For more information on gasoline or E85, see injury.
“Premium unleaded gasoline” (컄 page 413) or 왘 Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and
the Factory Approved Service Products pam- hold on to it until possible pressure is
왘 Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
phlet. released.
until i